TW402649B - Buttonhole darning sewing machine - Google Patents

Buttonhole darning sewing machine Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW402649B
TW402649B TW87110364A TW87110364A TW402649B TW 402649 B TW402649 B TW 402649B TW 87110364 A TW87110364 A TW 87110364A TW 87110364 A TW87110364 A TW 87110364A TW 402649 B TW402649 B TW 402649B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
needle
cloth
swing
sewing machine
feed
Prior art date
Application number
TW87110364A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Mitsuhiro Tachikawa
Kazuaki Ishii
Yasuaki Hirano
Toshiaki Kasuga
Akira Maeda
Original Assignee
Juki Kk
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Juki Kk filed Critical Juki Kk
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW402649B publication Critical patent/TW402649B/en

Links

Classifications

    • DTEXTILES; PAPER
    • D05SEWING; EMBROIDERING; TUFTING
    • D05BSEWING
    • D05B69/00Driving-gear; Control devices
    • D05B69/22Devices for stopping drive when sewing tools have reached a predetermined position
    • DTEXTILES; PAPER
    • D05SEWING; EMBROIDERING; TUFTING
    • D05BSEWING
    • D05B19/00Programme-controlled sewing machines
    • D05B19/02Sewing machines having electronic memory or microprocessor control unit
    • D05B19/12Sewing machines having electronic memory or microprocessor control unit characterised by control of operation of machine
    • D05B19/14Control of needle movement, e.g. varying amplitude or period of needle movement
    • DTEXTILES; PAPER
    • D05SEWING; EMBROIDERING; TUFTING
    • D05BSEWING
    • D05B3/00Sewing apparatus or machines with mechanism for lateral movement of the needle or the work or both for making ornamental pattern seams, for sewing buttonholes, for reinforcing openings, or for fastening articles, e.g. buttons, by sewing
    • D05B3/06Sewing apparatus or machines with mechanism for lateral movement of the needle or the work or both for making ornamental pattern seams, for sewing buttonholes, for reinforcing openings, or for fastening articles, e.g. buttons, by sewing for sewing buttonholes
    • DTEXTILES; PAPER
    • D05SEWING; EMBROIDERING; TUFTING
    • D05BSEWING
    • D05B69/00Driving-gear; Control devices
    • D05B69/22Devices for stopping drive when sewing tools have reached a predetermined position
    • D05B69/24Applications of devices for indicating or ascertaining sewing-tool position

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Textile Engineering (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Sewing Machines And Sewing (AREA)

Abstract

There is provided needle drop control means which, when a sewing machine stop signal is generated, sets a needle 9 stop position on the more right side than a cloth cutting knife 16 with respect to an operator. The needle drop control means, when the formation of buttonhole darning stitches is completed, sets the needle 9 stop position on the more right side than a cloth cutting knife 16 with respect to the operator. The needle drop control means includes electrical drive means for moving a needle 9 to a given position existing in the right and left direction, and a control circuit for giving a drive instruction to the electrical drive means to stop the needle 9 at the given position, that is, the given needle stop position.

Description

五、發明說明() 本發明係有關利用 4a ?[ # ^ , 裁布刀在—塊布料上形成鈕孔的一 4鈕孔織補縫紉機, -部縫針擺動縫切機 具有這種紐孔織補縫幼機的 類々去 &曰本專利申請公告案平成第7-14438號及 類似者中可以渣#娌 Λ ^ ,裁布刀係建構成能夠透過一個主 凸輪而上下移動—次。 U王 °在這種型式的鈕孔織補縫紉機中,縫針及 裁布刀係配置在與布料進給方向相同的一條線上,縫針位 於=上面,較裁布刀更接近操作者數毫米,並有一根用 、壓布機的支撐手臂從較縫針及裁布刀更左側處延伸 此外,於某些這種型式之鈕孔織補縫紉機中,有一根縫 針以縫針針眼朝布料進給方向 '亦即對操作者之往復方向 敞開的冑方式裝配。因此,當一條縫線穿過針眼時,操 作者必J在靠近位於較裁布刀更接近他那一侧數毫求之支 揮手’的個位置處進行縫線插人程序,*當針眼朝操作 者之在復方向配置時,裁布刀、支撐手臂以及類似裝置於 當操作者將-條縫線穿過針眼時成了操作者之障礙而使 縫線插入程序變得很麻煩。 本發明的一個目的在於提供一種其令的縫線易於穿入 缝針内之鈕孔織補縫紉機。 為了達到目的,根據本發明之第一項觀點,提供了一 部鈕孔織補縫紉機,其包括有:可朝左右方向擺動、並能 夠於其擺動位置上下移動而形成鈕孔織補縫線的—根縫針 ,一塊沿縫紉機底座表面配置之布料固定板;配置在比 A7 B7 40264这 五、發明說明(2 ) 右側擺動位置更左側上面的一根布料固定手臂,其前端 部分位於一操作者側上面;形成機架形狀,並能夠將鈕孔 織補縫線外圍邊緣之布料固定於布料固定板與其本身之間 的機架形夾板本體,夾板本體支撐於布料固定手臂之前端 部分右侧上面;大體上可朝左右方向下降在機架形夾板本 艘之機架形狀内的中心位置之裁布刀;以及當用以停止縫 紉機的一個信號產生時,將擺動位置固定而使缝針停止的 位置座落在比裁布刀更接近操作者右侧的缝針下降控制裝 置。 " 於此,裁布刀係一把能夠上下移動而在一塊布料上形 成紐孔的刀具,並於其下方部分具有一個裁剪邊緣。 舉例來說’縫針下降控制裝置係包括在一顆CPU内。 如上所述’根據本發明之第一項觀點,當縫紉機停止 信號產生時,縫針停止位置或擺動位置由縫針下降控制裝 置設定在比裁布刀更接近操作者右側的位置上《有鑑於此 ’當縫紉機停止信號產生時,缝線可以很容易地穿過於裁 布刀右側上面停止之縫針的針眼,而不會受到裁布刀之阻 礙。 根據本發明之第二項觀點,於第一項觀點之鈕孔織補 縫紉機中,當鈕孔織補縫線形成之後,縫針下降控制裝置 將縫針停止位置設定在比裁布刀更接近操作者右側的位置 上。 如上所述,由於縫針下降控制裝置係建構成當鈕孔織 補縫線形成之後’將缝針停止位置或擺動位置設定在比裁 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) I I ! II----,、-裝 i ---— —訂--— — — — — — * (請先閱讀背面夂注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製V. Description of the invention () The present invention relates to a 4-button hole darning sewing machine which uses 4a? [# ^, A cloth cutter to form a button hole on a piece of fabric, In the category of the young machine, the patent application publication No. Heisei 7-14438 and the like can slag # 娌 Λ ^. The cloth cutter system is constructed to be able to move up and down once through a main cam. U 王 ° In this type of buttonhole darning sewing machine, the needles and cutting knives are arranged on the same line as the feeding direction of the fabric, and the needles are located on the top = a few millimeters closer to the operator than the cutting knives. The support arm of the root and cloth pressing machine extends from the left side of the needle and the cloth cutter. In addition, in some types of buttonhole darning sewing machines, there is a needle with the needle eye facing the cloth feeding direction. The reciprocating direction of the operator is opened in a cymbal manner. Therefore, when a suture passes through the eye of the needle, the operator must perform a suture insertion procedure near a position that is located closer to his side than the cutting knife, which is the most demanding wave. * When the eye of the needle is facing When the operator is arranged in the multi-direction, the cloth cutter, the support arm and the like become obstacles for the operator when the operator passes the suture through the eye of the needle, which makes the procedure of thread insertion very cumbersome. An object of the present invention is to provide a buttonhole darning sewing machine which allows the stitches to be easily threaded into the needles. In order to achieve the object, according to the first aspect of the present invention, a buttonhole darning sewing machine is provided, which includes: a root that can swing in the left-right direction and can move up and down in its swing position to form a buttonhole darning stitch. Needle, a cloth fixing plate arranged along the surface of the base of the sewing machine; a cloth fixing arm arranged on the upper left side than the right swing position on the right side of the fifth, invention description A7 B7 40264, the front part of which is located on the operator side; Form a rack shape, and be able to fix the cloth at the peripheral edge of the buttonhole patchwork seam to the rack-shaped plywood body between the cloth fixing plate and itself, the plywood body is supported on the right side of the front end of the cloth fixing arm; A cloth cutter that is lowered to the left and right at the center of the rack shape of the rack-shaped plywood; and when a signal to stop the sewing machine is generated, the swing position is fixed so that the needle stops. Needle lowering control device closer to the operator's right side than the cutting knife. " Here, the cloth cutting knife is a knife capable of moving up and down to form a buttonhole in a piece of fabric, and has a cutting edge at the lower part. For example, the 'stitch lowering control device is included in a CPU. As described above, 'According to the first aspect of the present invention, when the sewing machine stop signal is generated, the needle stop position or swing position is set by the needle lowering control device to a position closer to the right side of the operator than the cutting knife. "In view of this" When the sewing machine stop signal is generated, the sewing thread can easily pass through the eye of the needle stopped on the right side of the cutter without being hindered by the cutter. According to the second aspect of the present invention, in the buttonhole darning sewing machine of the first aspect, after the buttonhole darning stitch is formed, the needle lowering control device sets the needle stop position closer to the operator's right side than the cutting knife. Location. As mentioned above, due to the construction of the needle drop control device, when the buttonhole darning stitches are formed, the needle stop position or swing position is set to a size smaller than the paper size of the paper. Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Ii) II! II ---- ,,-install i ----- — order --- — — — — — — * (Please read the 夂 note on the back before filling this page) Intellectual Property Bureau Staff Consumer Cooperatives Print

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

布刀更接近操作者右側的位置上,且當益孔織補縫線形成 之後,縫針亦可在比裁布刀更右侧的位置上面停止。 根據本發明之第三項觀點,縫針下降控制裝置包括有 供將縫針朝左右方向擺向特定位置之電動裝1,以及一條 產生驅動指令,使電動裝置將缝針擺向縫針停止位置的控 制電路。 舉例來說,不僅可以使用一具脈衝馬達,亦可使用其 他型式之馬達、螺線管或類似裝置作為電動裝置。 如上所述,由於縫針下降控制裝置係建構成縫針停止 位置或擺動位置可利用必須由控制裝置產生的一個指令驅 動之電動裝置設定在裁布刀的右侧上面,因此當鈕孔織補 縫線形成之後,縫針能夠正確地在比裁布刀更右侧的位置 上面停止。 根據本發明之第四項觀點,提供了一部鈕孔織補縫鲂 機,其包括有:可朝左右方向擺動、並能夠於其擺動位置 上下移動而形成鈕孔織補縫線的一根縫針;一塊沿縫紉機 底座表面配置之布料固定板;配置在比各左右側擺動位置 更左側上面的一根布料固定手臂,其前端部分位於—操作 者侧上面;形成機架形狀,並能夠將鈕孔織補縫線外圍邊 緣之布料固定於布料固定板與其本身之間的機架形夾板本 體,夾板本體支撐於布料固定手臂之前端部分右侧上面; 大體上可朝左右方向下降在機架形夾板本體之機架形狀内 的中心位置之裁布刀;以及當操作時用以產生一信號的一 個控制開關;供將縫針朝左右方向擺向一特定位置的電動 {請先閲讀背面<注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝--------訂:The cloth knife is closer to the right side of the operator, and the needle can also stop at a position more to the right than the cloth knife after the beneficial stitches are formed. According to the third aspect of the present invention, the needle lowering control device includes an electric device 1 for swinging the needle to a specific position in the left-right direction, and a control circuit for generating a drive command to cause the electric device to swing the needle to the needle stop position. . For example, not only a pulse motor but also other types of motors, solenoids or similar devices can be used as electric devices. As mentioned above, because the needle drop control device is constructed to form a needle stop position or swing position, an electric device that must be driven by a command generated by the control device can be used to set it on the right side of the cutting knife. After that, the sewing needle can stop at a position more to the right than the cutter. According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, a buttonhole darning sewing machine is provided, which includes: a needle that can swing in the left-right direction and can move up and down in its swing position to form a buttonhole darning suture; A cloth fixing plate arranged along the surface of the sewing machine base; a cloth fixing arm arranged on the upper left side than the left and right side swing positions, the front part of which is located on the operator side; forming a frame shape and capable of darning buttonholes The fabric at the peripheral edge of the suture is fixed to the rack-shaped plywood body between the cloth fixing plate and itself. The plywood body is supported on the right side of the front end of the cloth-fixing arm; it can be lowered to the left and right of the rack-shaped plywood body. A cloth cutter at the center position in the shape of the frame; and a control switch to generate a signal when operated; an electric motor for swinging the needle to a specific position from left to right {please read the back < precautions before filling (This page)

本紙張尺度ϋ财關家標芈丄WSM4規格⑵Ο X 297公髮) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明( 裝置;以及連同控制開關產生之信號,將縫針移動至比裁 布刀更接近操作者右側的擺動位置之縫針下降控制裝置。 於此,不僅可以使用一個縫線插入開關,亦可使用其 他型式的開關作為控制開關。 不僅可以使用一具脈衝馬達,亦可使用其他型式之馬 達、螺線管或類似裝置作為電動裝置。 如上所述’由於根據縫針下降控制裝置產生的一個指 令以及控制開關所產生的信號,縫針停止位置或縫紉機之 擺動位置可以透過電動裝置之驅動而設定在比裁布刀更接 近操作者右側的位置上,因此缝線可以很容易地穿過於裁 布刀右側上面停止之縫針的針眼,而不會受到裁布刀之阻 礙。 第1圖為用於本發明之鈕孔織補缝紉機的一個外觀透 視圖, 第2圖為本發明之叙孔織補縫紉機的第一項實施例之 圖解透視圊,並繪示了其内部機構; 第3圖亦為本發明之鈕孔織補縫紉機的第一項實施例 之圖解透視圖,其係從第2圖之反側觀測,並繪示了其内 部機構; 第4圖為繪示於第3圖之縫針擺動機構的一個前視圖, 其係從縫針侧觀測; 第5圖為飧示於第4圖之縫針擺動機構的一個代表圖, 敘述了其運作情形; 第6(a)圖為縫針擺動機構的一個視圊,繪示了當縫針 本紙張尺度適用中國國豕標準(CNS〉A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 7 ------!1!1'、 ^^ ·!1 訂---------—rM (請—先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) A7 B7 個阖 402649 五、發明說明( 擺動凸輪之凸輪頂端部分位於基線側上面時的一個狀態; 而第6(b)圖為縫針擺動機構的一個視圖,其續·示了當縫斜 摄動凸輪之凸輪頂端部分位於凸輪擺動寬度側上面時的〜 個狀態; 第7圖緣示了基線位置之改變必須透過縫針擺動機構 完成; 第8圖给示了擺動寬度位置之變化必須透過縫針擺動 機構完成, 第9圖為一個表格,繪示了基線脈衝電動機及擺動寬 度脈衝電動機之脈衝輸出數目; 第10圖為代表脈衝數目-基線移動量之特性的一個圖 示 第11圖為代表脈衝數目-縫針擺動量之特性的 示 第12(a)圖繪示了鈕孔織補部分之各部分的名稱,第 12⑻圖料了其右旋圖案,第12⑷圖♦示了其左旋圖案; 第13圖為裁布刀傳動機構的一個透視圖; 第14圖⑷繪示了 -塊布料由裁布刀第-次向下移動 而裁剪-次時的-個狀態,帛14(b)圖綠示了布料進給方 向,而第14(c)繪示了裁布刀第二次向下移動; 第15圖為可利用音頻線圈馬達控制其變化之拉力 的一個戴面圖; 第16⑷圖緣示了包含第一條縫線的_個縫合起始部 分,而第刚緣示了包含最後—條縫線的一個固定縫 — — — — — ιίιιιιλ \γ « — — — HI— ·11111111 {請‘先閱讀背面之-注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 例 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 圖 例 A7 __ B7 五、發明說明(6 ) 線縫合部分; 第17圖為本發明之鈕孔織補縫紉機 面4 巧第一項實施例之 圖解透視圖,並繪示了類似於第2圖之内部機構, 第18圖為本發明之鈕孔織補縫紉機 m . J币二項實施例之 囫解透視圓,並繪示了類似於第2圖之内部機構. 第19圊為本發明之鈕孔織補縫紉機的第四項實施例之 圖解透視圖,並繪示了類似於第2圖之内部機構; 第20圖為本發明之钮孔織補,縫初機的第五項實施例之 圖解透視圖,也就是說,其為縫針擺動機構的另一個實施 例,並繪示了類似於第3圖之内部機構; 第21圖為本發明乏鈕孔織補縫紉機的第六項實施例之 圖解透視圖,並繪示了類似於第3圖之内部機構; 第22圖為本發明之鈕孔織補縫紉機的第七項實施例, 尤其是,第22圖為利用機械傳動機構將裁布刀上下移動之 傳動系統的一個透視圖; 第23圖繪示了本發明之鈕孔織補縫紉機的第八項實施 尤其是,第23圖為裁布刀傳動系統的一個透視圖; 第24圖為裁布刀安裝結構之通用範例的一個分解透視 第25圖繪示了本發明之鈕孔織補縫紉機的第九項實施 尤其是,第2 5囷為判定部件的一個分解透視圖; 第26圖為判定部件結構的一個分解透視圖,其中第25 囷中繪示之結構作了部分修改; 第27(a)圏為一般裁布刀的—個視圖,第27(b)及2 ) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家赛準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讚背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)This paper is standard (financial and financial standards) WSM4 specifications (0 X 297). Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (apparatus; and together with the signal generated by the control switch, the needle is moved more than the cloth cutter. The needle drop control device near the swing position on the right side of the operator. Here, not only a stitch insertion switch can be used, but also other types of switches can be used as control switches. Not only a pulse motor but also other types of A motor, solenoid, or similar device is used as an electric device. As described above, 'the needle stop position or the swing position of the sewing machine can be set by driving the electric device due to a command generated by the needle lowering control device and a signal generated by a control switch. It is closer to the operator's right side than the cutting knife, so the suture can easily pass through the eye of the needle stopped on the right side of the cutting knife without being blocked by the cutting knife. An external perspective view of the buttonhole darning sewing machine of the present invention, and FIG. A schematic perspective view of the first embodiment of the hole-drilling sewing machine and its internal mechanism is shown in FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is also a schematic perspective view of the first embodiment of the button-hole darning sewing machine of the present invention. Figure 2 is viewed from the opposite side, and its internal mechanism is shown; Figure 4 is a front view of the needle swing mechanism shown in Figure 3, which is viewed from the side of the needle; Figure 5 is shown at 第Figure 4 is a representative diagram of the needle swing mechanism, describing its operation; Figure 6 (a) is a view of the needle swing mechanism, showing that when the paper size of the needle is applicable to the Chinese national standard (CNS> A4 specification) (210 X 297 public love) 7 ------! 1! 1 ', ^^ ·! 1 Order ---------— rM (Please—Read the notes on the back before filling this page ) A7 B7 阖 402649 V. Description of the invention (a state when the top end portion of the cam of the swing cam is above the baseline side; and Figure 6 (b) is a view of the needle swing mechanism, which is shown continuously when the stitch is slanted The state when the top end portion of the moving cam is located above the cam swing width side; Figure 7 shows the baseline position The change of the position must be completed through the needle swing mechanism. Figure 8 shows that the change of the swing width position must be completed through the needle swing mechanism. Figure 9 is a table showing the pulse output number of the baseline pulse motor and the swing width pulse motor. Figure 10 is a graph representing the characteristics of the number of pulses-baseline movement. Figure 11 is a graph representing the characteristics of the number of pulses-stitch swing. Figure 12 (a) shows the parts of the buttonhole darning part. Name, Figure 12⑻ shows its right-handed pattern, Figure 12⑷ shows its left-handed pattern; Figure 13 is a perspective view of the cloth cutter driving mechanism; Figure 14⑷ shows a piece of cloth by a cloth cutter The first time it moves down and the state when it is cut-time, 帛 14 (b) green shows the cloth feed direction, and 14 (c) shows the second downward movement of the cloth cutting knife; Figure 15 is a wearing view that can use the audio coil motor to control its changing tension; Figure 16 shows the edge of _ suture containing the first stitch, and the first edge shows the last stitch Thread of a fixed seam — — — — — ίιιιλλ \ γ «— — — HI — · 11111111 {Please read the back-notes before filling out this page) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and the Consumer Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed A7 __ B7 V. Description of the invention (6) Thread stitching part; Figure 17 is a schematic perspective view of the first embodiment of the buttonhole darning sewing machine surface of the present invention, and shows the internal mechanism similar to Figure 2, Fig. 18 is a perspective view of the buttonhole darning sewing machine m. J coin of the present invention, and illustrates an internal mechanism similar to Fig. 2. Fig. 19 is a section of the buttonhole darning sewing machine of the present invention. A schematic perspective view of the four embodiments and an internal mechanism similar to that of FIG. 2; FIG. 20 is a schematic perspective view of the fifth embodiment of the buttonhole darning and initial sewing machine of the present invention, that is, , Which is another embodiment of the needle swing mechanism, and shows an internal mechanism similar to that of FIG. 3; FIG. 21 is a schematic perspective view of the sixth embodiment of the buttonless darning sewing machine of the present invention, and shows Similar to Figure 3 Internal mechanism; FIG. 22 is a seventh embodiment of the buttonhole darning sewing machine according to the present invention, and in particular, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of a transmission system for moving the cloth cutter up and down using a mechanical transmission mechanism; FIG. 23 is a drawing The eighth embodiment of the buttonhole darning sewing machine of the present invention is shown. In particular, FIG. 23 is a perspective view of a cutting knife transmission system. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of a general example of a mounting structure of the cutting knife. The ninth embodiment of the buttonhole darning sewing machine of the present invention is shown. In particular, 25th 囷 is an exploded perspective view of a judging part; FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the structure of the judging part. The structure of the display is partially modified; Section 27 (a) 圏 is a view of a general cloth cutter, Sections 27 (b) and 2) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297) Li) (Please read the notes on the back of the like before filling in this page)

五、發明說明(7 ) 圖分別為本發明第十項實施例的視圖 圖為含有一個堍 丹疋第27(b) 古加 4出孔之裁布刀的視圖,而第27(c)圏為含 有-個斜裁部分之裁布刀的視圖; "圏為含 ,第28⑷圖♦示了 _判^部件之側視圖,其上— :判定:關’開關具有一個與逸出孔對應的按鍵式開關部 刀,而第28(b)圓為其前視圖; 第29⑷圖㈣了—判定部件之側視圖,其上 開關具有一個與斜裁孔對應的按鍵式開關部 而第29(b)囷為其前視圖; 第30圖為-麼布機及裁布刀的一個透視圖並緣示了 其間的關係; 第31圖繪示了本發明之第十-項實施例,尤其是,第 3 1圖為其透視圖,其中 一 固定臂的前端部分侧上面;。、器配置在一根布料 個透=圖為—對上方縫線剪刀及其所用之傳動機構的- 第對上方縫線剪刀及凸輪的一個平面圖並 繪不了其間的關係; 第34圖為上方縫線剪刀的一個平面圖,纷示了其朝與 ==給方向相同之方向移動而固定—條上方縫線時的一 第35圖為用於-部鈕孔織補縫匆機内的_個控制 之方塊圖; 第36圖為控制面板的一個前視圖; 本紙張適时國峨轉(CNS)A4規格(21〇二297公董 個子程 每◎ 2 6 4 9 Α7 ---Β7 五、發明說明() 第37圖為根據何種控制是由第35圖中繪示之控制組塊 執行的一個通用流程圖; 第38圏為用於一控制面板設定程序(步驟S1)的一個子 程序之流程圖; $ 39圏為示出了欲設定項目的一個表格; $ 4〇圓纷示了關於钮孔織補部分設定之條件; 第41圖為用於一圖案變化程序(步驟S106)的一個子程 序之流程囷; 第42圖為用於一參數變化程序(步驟S10 8)的一個子程 序之流程圖; 第43圖為用於一速度變化程序(步驟S110)的一個子程 序之流程圖; 第44圖為用於-縫線插入程序(步驟S112)的一 序之流程圏; 第 45(a)圖給^ 7 i v不了於縫線插入程序中,縫針與位於縫 針後方之裁布刀夕pq , _ 之間關係的侧視圖,而第45(b)圖為其前 視 丁了备縫針對裁布刀向右擺動至,最高位置時的一 個狀態; 1 第46圖繪示了相對於裁布刀而下 第47圖為用於一 ^ Λ .. 拉力鉤匹配程序(步驟S114)的一個子 程序之流程圖; 以 y j w丁 第48(a)圏為縫針於栽 祕針於裁布刀右方上面停止時之狀態的 一個十面圖,第 t )圖為縫針移動至壓布機的縫針針孔 本紙張尺度_ _關家 ----1 Λ .\^ i — — — — — — ^- — — — — — — 11 Μ C請先閲缜背面之-注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 降至左側的最後一根 縫針 χ 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(9 ) 中心時之狀態的一個平面圖,第48(c)圖為縫針向下移動 時之狀態的一個前視圖’而第48(d)圖為針天心自其停止 位置向下移動時之狀態的一個前視圖; 第49圖為用於縫合資料產生程序(步驟s3)的一個子程 序之流程圖; 第50圖為用於放大/縮小程序(步驟S31)的一個子程序 之流程圖; 第51 (a)圖為用於放大/縮小程序中的一個參考點之視 圖’而第51(b)圖為紐孔織補程序之各個部分的一個表示 圖; 第52圖為用於一加壓器/刀具尺寸檢測程序(步驟s3 2) 的一個子程序之流程圚; 第53圖為用於一圖案操作程序(步驟S3 5)的一個子程 序之流程圖; 第54圖為右旋縫合序列的一個視圖; 第55圖為縫合資料運算結果的一個表格; 第56圖為用於縫合開始位置控制程序(步驟S351)的一 個子程序之流程圖; 第57圖繪示了如何決定一個刀具下降中心位置; 第58圖為用於左側平行部分控制程序(步驟S352)的一 個子程序之流程圊; 第59圖為用於第一密線部分控制程序(步驟S3 53)的一 個子程序之流程圖; 第60圖為第一密線部分高達其中間部分的一個詳細分 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21Q χ挪公楚) 12 -----------V V、-裝---^-----訂---------'氧 (請先閱讀背面之-注意事項再填寫本頁) A7 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明( 析圖; 第6!圖為用於右侧平行部分控制程序(步驟s354)的一 個子程序之流程圖; 第62圖為用於第二密線部分控制程序(步驟奶5)的一 個子程序之流程圖; 第63圖為用於縫合端控制程序(步驟s356)的一個子輕 序之流程圖; 第64圖為用於刀具媒動時間控制程序(步称s36)的一 個子程序之流程圖; 第65圖為代表缝線數目係與刀具驅動次數相對應之刀 具驅動控制次數的一個表格; 第66圖為用於鈕孔織補部分的—個條件表; 第67圖為具有一進給感測器與刀具下降開關以測定 裁布刀從Y進給之操作時間的一個結構之透視圖; 第68(a)圖為當一塊布料藉由辑布刀第一次上下移動 而裁剪之後的一個狀態之透視圖,而第68(a)圖為當布料 之剩餘部分藉由裁布刀第二次上下移動而裁剪之後的—個 狀態之透視圖; 第69(a)圖為第一及第二次刀具下降彼此互相重疊時 的一個狀態圖,而第69(b)圖為第一及第二次刀具下降嚴 重重疊的一個狀態圖; 第70圖為刀具下降時間的一個變化圖; 第71圊為整個刀具下降位置移動的一個視圖; 第72圖為恢復機器原點程序(步驟S5)的一個子程序之 卜紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公髮 ------------Γ».—裝.!l·----訂---------Μ (請先閲象背面<注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 邊〇么648 A7 __ _ B7 五、發明說明(1 ) 流程圖; 第73圊為縫合操作程序(步驟S15)的一個子程序之流 程圖; 第74圖為用於TG中斷程序(步驟S160)的一個子程序之 流程圖; 第75圖為縫針上方位置中斷程序(步驟S1 62)的—個變 化圖; 第76圖為一刀具驅動程序(步驟S1625)的視圖; 第77圖為裁布機向下移動程序(S16264)的一個子程序 之流程圖; 第78圖為進給參考中斷程序(步驟S1 64)的一個子程序 之流程圖; 第79圖為裁布刀計數器中斷程序(步驟8165)的一個子 程序之流程圖; 第80圊為裁布刀驅動檢測程序(步驟S1654)的一個子 程序之流程圖; 第81圖繪示了控制系統的一個修正,尤其是,第81圖 為部分修正了第37圖中繪示之通用流程圖所得到的一個通 用流程圖; 第82圖繪示了在一鈕孔織補操作中所用的條件; 第83圖為縫合程序(步驟S22)的一個子程序之流程圖; 第84圖為縫合程序(1)(步驟S222)的一個子程序之流裎 圃, 第85圖為縫合程序(3)(步驟S225)的一個子程序之流 本紙張Μ欄,國家標準(C1^_4規格⑽χ脱公爱)-Γ-Τ2Γ^---- -----ri裝--------訂_ (請先閱讀背面冬注意事項再填寫本頁) 侧6仙V. Description of the invention (7) The figures are the views of the tenth embodiment of the present invention, respectively. The figure is a view of a cloth cutter containing a dandelion 27 (b) Gujia 4 outlet, and the 27 (c) 圏Is a view of a cloth cutting knife with a diagonal cutting part; " 圏 is included, Fig. 28⑷ shows a side view of a _judgment ^ component, above which:: Judgment: Off 'switch has a corresponding to the escape hole 28 (b) circle is its front view; Figure 29⑷ shows the side view of the judging part, the switch has a push-button switch section corresponding to the oblique hole and the 29 ( b) 囷 is a front view thereof; FIG. 30 is a perspective view of a cloth cutter and a cutting knife and shows the relationship between them; FIG. 31 shows a tenth- embodiment of the present invention, especially Figure 31 is a perspective view of the front end of one of the fixed arms; The device is arranged on a piece of fabric. The picture is-for the upper suture scissors and the transmission mechanism used-a plan view of the upper pair of suture scissors and cam and the relationship between them cannot be drawn; Figure 34 shows the upper stitch A plan view of the thread scissors, showing that it moves in the same direction as the == given direction and is fixed-a 35th figure when the upper stitch is stitched is a control block for-buttonhole darning sewing machine Figure; Figure 36 is a front view of the control panel; This paper is in a timely manner Guoshen (CNS) A4 specifications (2,202,297 public directors per sub ◎ 2 6 4 9 Α7 --- B7 V. Description of the invention ( Figure 37 is a general flowchart according to which control is executed by the control block shown in Figure 35; Figure 38 is a flowchart of a subroutine for a control panel setting procedure (step S1) $ 39 圏 is a table showing the items to be set; $ 40 is a list showing the conditions for setting the buttonhole darning part; Figure 41 is a subroutine for a pattern change program (step S106) Process 囷; Figure 42 is a procedure for a parameter change (steps S10 8) is a flowchart of a subroutine; FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a subroutine for a speed change program (step S110); FIG. 44 is a flowchart of a suture insertion program (step S112) The sequence of the sequence 圏; Figure 45 (a) gives ^ 7 iv In the thread insertion process, the side view of the relationship between the needle and the cutting knife pq, _ located behind the needle, and Figure 45 (b) For its front view, it is a state when the preparation knife is swung to the right to the highest position; 1 Fig. 46 shows the lower position relative to the cutter. Fig. 47 is for a ^ Λ. A flowchart of a subroutine of the hook matching program (step S114); a ten-sided view of the state when yjw Ding No. 48 (a) 圏 is used as the sewing needle when the needle is stopped on the right side of the cutting knife, t) The picture shows the paper size when the needle moves to the needle hole of the cloth presser On the back-please note this page, please fill in this page) The last consumer needle printed on the left side of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs's Consumer Cooperatives Co., Ltd. (297 mm) Printed by A7 B7 of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (9) A plan view of the state at the center. Figure 48 (c) is a front view of the state when the needle moves downwards. d) The figure is a front view of the state when the needle Tianxin moves downwards from its stop position; Figure 49 is a flowchart of a subroutine for the stitching data generation procedure (step s3); Figure 50 is for enlargement Flow chart of a subroutine of the zoom-in / out procedure (step S31); Figure 51 (a) is a view for zooming in / out of a reference point in the program 'and Figure 51 (b) shows each of the buttonhole darning procedures A representation of the part; FIG. 52 is a flow chart of a subroutine for a presser / tool size detection program (step s3 2); FIG. 53 is a diagram for a pattern operation program (step S3 5) A flowchart of a subroutine; FIG. 54 is a view of the right-handed suture sequence; FIG. 55 is a table of the operation results of the stitching data; and FIG. 56 is a subroutine for the stitching start position control program (step S351). Flowchart; Figure 57 shows Fig. 58 shows the flow of a subroutine for the left-side parallel part control program (step S352); Fig. 59 shows the first dense-line part control program (step S3 53). A flowchart of a subroutine; Figure 60 is a detailed copy of the first dense line part up to the middle part. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21Q χNuo Chu) 12 ----- ------ VV, -install --- ^ ----- order --------- 'oxygen (please read the-notice on the back before filling this page) A7 A7 Wisdom of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Property Bureau. 5. Explanation of the invention (analysis diagram; Figure 6! Is a flowchart of a subroutine for the right parallel control program (step s354); Figure 62 is for the second dense line A flowchart of a subroutine of a part of the control program (step 5); FIG. 63 is a flowchart of a sub-light sequence for the suture end control program (step s356); FIG. 64 is of a tool medium motion time control A flowchart of a subroutine of the program (step s36); Figure 65 represents the number of sutures and the tool drive A table of the number of times of tool driving control corresponding to the number of times; Figure 66 is a table of conditions for the buttonhole darning part; Figure 67 is a feed sensor with a knife down switch to determine the cutting knife from Y A perspective view of a structure of the operating time of the feed; Fig. 68 (a) is a perspective view of a state after a piece of fabric is cut by moving the cloth knife up and down for the first time, and Fig. 68 (a) is A perspective view of the state after the remaining part of the cloth is cut by the cloth cutter moving up and down for the second time; Fig. 69 (a) is a state diagram when the first and second times of the knife fall over each other, Fig. 69 (b) is a state diagram where the first and second tool descents are severely overlapped; Fig. 70 is a change chart of the tool descent time; Fig. 71 is a view of the entire tool descent position movement; The picture shows a subroutine of the procedure of restoring the machine's origin (step S5). The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297) ------------ Γ ».— Install.! l · ---- Order --------- M (Please read the back of the elephant < note before filling in this page) Printed side of employee consumer cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 〇 Mod 648 A7 __ _ B7 V. Description of the invention (1) Flow chart; Figure 73) is a flowchart of a subroutine of the suture operation program (step S15); Figure 74 is a flowchart of a subroutine for the TG interrupt program (step S160); Fig. 75 is a change diagram of the position interruption program (step S1 62) above the needle; Fig. 76 is a view of a cutter driver program (step S1625); Fig. 77 is a view of the cutting machine downward movement program (S16264) A flowchart of a subroutine; Fig. 78 is a flowchart of a subroutine of the feed reference interruption routine (step S1 64); Fig. 79 is a flowchart of a subroutine of the cutting knife counter interruption routine (step 8165) ; 80th is a flowchart of a subroutine of the cutting knife driving detection program (step S1654); FIG. 81 shows a modification of the control system, in particular, FIG. 81 is a partial modification of the drawing in FIG. 37 A general flow chart obtained from the shown general flow chart; Shows the conditions used in a buttonhole darning operation; Figure 83 is a flowchart of a subroutine of the stitching procedure (step S22); Figure 84 is a flow of a subroutine of the stitching procedure (1) (step S222) Fig. 85 is a subroutine of the current paper M column of the stitching procedure (3) (step S225), the national standard (C1 ^ _4 specification ⑽χ 脱 公 爱) -Γ-Τ2Γ ^ ------ --- ri outfit -------- order_ (Please read the winter precautions on the back before filling in this page) Side 6 cents

五、發明說明( 圖; 12 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 第86⑷圖為前刀具裁㈣序必須於_織補縫 合之則元成的視圖’第86〇3)圓為後刀具裁剪程序必 鈕孔織補缝線完全縫合之後完成的視圖,❿第8 兔 中間刀具縫裁剪程序必須於紐孔織補缝線正在縫合時^ 的視圖; ^^ 第87⑷圖為緣示了上下方布料於預縫裁剪程序中係 如何裁剪之側視圖,第87⑻圖為當縫針穿過紐孔而將^ 下縫線連接在一起時所得到的抽絲飾縫之侧視圖,而第 87(c)圖為繪示了沒有’任何布料線材(織線)留在鈕孔内之侧 視圖; 第88圖為鈕孔織補縫線於後刀具及中間刀具裁剪程序 中形成之狀態的一個侧視圖; 第89圖為左旋圖案操作程序(步驟S38)的一個子程序 之流程圖; 第90圖為左旋縫合序列之視圖; 第91圖為缝合資料運算結果的一個表格; 第92(a)及(b)圖為必須藉由縫針縫合機構完成之左旋 及右旋操作的說明圖,尤其是,第92(a)圖為繪示了一條 基線之移動的一個前視圖,而第92(b)圖為其側視圖; 第93(a)及93(b)圖為必須由一縫針擺動機構完成之左 旋及右旋程序的說明圖,尤其是,第93(a)圖為繪示了縫 針擺動量變化的一個前視圖,第93(b)圖為其左視圖,而 第93(c)圖為其右視圖; 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ir Μ--------^---------Μ. Γ 请先閱讀背面之速意事項再填寫本I) A7 B7 五、發明說明( 13 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 第第於二孔織補操作之條件的-個視圖·, 岡芍繪不了必須設定之項目; 程序第之=為圖縫合起始位置運作程序(步驟隨)的一個子 程序第之侧平行部分運作程序(步驟削)的一個子 圖為第一固定縫線部分運作程序(步驟Η 8 個子程序之流程圖; 圖為第—固定縫線部分運作程序(步驟幻85)的一 個子程序之流程圓; 第100圖為縫合末端運作程序(步驟S386)的一個子程 序之流程圖; 第ιοί圖為一電路圖,其繪示了用以關閉電源的一個 繼電器之配置; 第102圖為一電路圖,其繪示了用以關閉電源之繼電 器的一個修正之配置; 第103圖為用於第44圖中繪示之縫線插入模式程序(步 驟S112)的子程序之第一項額外處理實施例丨的一個流程圖 t 第104圖類似於第103圖,為用於縫線插入模式程序( 步驟S112)的子程序之第二項額外處理實施例2的一個流程 圖; 第105圖為用於刀具驅動時間運作程序(步驟S36)之子 程序的一個額外處理實施例之流程圖; 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)V. Description of the invention (Figure; 12 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The 86th picture shows the cutting procedure of the front cutter. The sequence must be in the view of the darn stitching of Yuancheng's 863). The view of the buttonhole darning stitching completed after it has been completely stitched. ❿ The 8th rabbit middle cutter seam cutting procedure must be a view when the buttonhole darting suture is being stitched. ^^ Figure 87⑷ shows the top and bottom fabrics in the This is a side view of how to cut in the seam cutting process. The 87th figure is the side view of the thread-stitched seam obtained when the needle passes through the buttonhole to connect the ^ lower stitches together, and the 87th (c) is A side view is shown without any cloth thread (weaving thread) left in the buttonhole; Figure 88 is a side view of the state in which the buttonhole darning stitches are formed in the cutting process of the rear cutter and intermediate cutter; Figure 89 It is a flowchart of a subroutine of the left-handed pattern operation procedure (step S38); Fig. 90 is a view of the left-handed suture sequence; Fig. 91 is a table of the operation results of the suture data; Figs. 92 (a) and (b) are Must be completed by a needle suture mechanism Illustration of Cheng Zhi's left-handed and right-handed operations, in particular, Figure 92 (a) is a front view showing the movement of a baseline, and Figure 92 (b) is its side view; Figure 93 (a) And 93 (b) are explanatory diagrams of the left-handed and right-handed procedures that must be completed by a needle swing mechanism. ) Is the left side view, and Figure 93 (c) is the right side view; This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ir Μ -------- ^- -------- M. Γ Please read the quick note on the back before filling in this I) A7 B7 V. Invention Description (13 Printed on the second hole darning operation by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Conditional-a view, okay can not draw the items that must be set; program number = a subroutine of the operation procedure (step with) for the stitching starting position of the figure, a subsection of the side parallel operation procedure (step cutting) The picture shows the operation procedure of the first fixed suture part (step Η 8 subroutines; the picture shows the operation procedure of the first-fixed suture part (step The flow of a subroutine of a magic program) is shown in FIG. 100; FIG. 100 is a flowchart of a subroutine of the stitching end operation procedure (step S386); and FIG. Ιοί is a circuit diagram showing a relay for turning off the power. Configuration; Figure 102 is a circuit diagram showing a modified configuration of the relay for turning off the power; Figure 103 is a subroutine for the suture insertion mode program (step S112) shown in Figure 44 A flowchart of the first additional processing embodiment 丨 FIG. 104 is similar to FIG. 103 and is a flow of the second additional processing embodiment 2 of the subroutine for the suture insertion mode program (step S112). Fig. 105 is a flowchart of an additional processing embodiment for a subroutine of the tool driving time operation procedure (step S36); this paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)

To -----广、-裝-------訂---------Μ {請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} A7 B7 40^649 五、發明說明( 第106圖為提供了 一個縫針位置感測器之結構的—個 透視圖; 第107(A)圖為本發明之裁線機構的一個運作時間圖, 而第107(B)圖為本發明之裁線機構另一項實施例的一個運 作時間圖;以及 第108圖為上述實施例的一對上縫線剪刀之移動位置 的一個說明圖。 <第一項實施例> 首先,第1圖為本發明第一項實施例之鈕孔織補縫紉 機外觀的一個透視圖,另外,第2圖為第一項實施例之内 部機構輪廓的一個透視圖,而第3圖為從第2圖之反侧觀察 上述内部機構時的一個透視圖。 於第1至3圖中,參考字元分別表示如下:丨為缝紉機機 架、5為縫紉機馬達、6為上軸、7為曲柄機構、8為針天心 、9為縫針、10為垂直軸、u為下軸、12為掛鉤、13為線 軸箱、14為布料固定板、15為壓布機(機架形夾板本體)、 16為裁布刀(垂直移動刀具)、17為天平、18為針天心擺動 底座、19為拉力組塊、20為進給馬達(電動裝置:脈衝馬達) ' 21為進給機構(連結裝置)、3〇為用於裁布刀之氣缸元件 、31為刀具安裝板、40為基線馬達、41為擺動寬度馬達、 42為縫針擺動機構、而6〇為音頻線圈馬達。 如第1至3圖中所示,缝紉機機架i包括有一個其上表 面具有平底表面之底座2、豎立於底座2其中一個末端部分 侧上面的一個垂直本體部分3、以及配置在垂直本體部分3 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐 --I-----1-----裝-I I (請先閲揍背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂 d. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 --^------B7___ 五、發明說明(15 ) 上、大體上平行於底座2而延伸的一條手臂4,此外,縫紉 機機架1自侧面看起來大體上為U形。 > I I I I I J I I _ ΙΛ、 _ - (請讀背面之-注意事項再填寫本頁) 於上述之缝紉機機架1中,有一具縫紉機馬達5配置在 垂直本體部分3侧上面的末端部分上,上軸6可藉由縫紉機 馬達5驅動而旋轉,並配置在手臂4之内,針天心8透過曲 柄機構7而連接至上軸6的前端部分,而缝針9則安裝於針 天心8下方部分上。 此外’垂直軸10係配置在垂直本體部分3内,下轴^ 係配置在底座2内,而線軸箱13安裝於配置在下軸u前端 部分内的拉力鉤12上面。順便提一下,垂直軸1〇之上端部 分係透過斜齒輪6a及l〇a而接至上軸6’而垂直軸1〇之下端 部分則透過斜齒輪1 Ob及11 a接至下軸11。 -'Μ. 再者,底座2上面配置有可移動之布料固定板14,而 在布料固定板14上方則配置了具有機架形本體部分的壓布 機15與能夠垂直移動的裁布刀16。順便提一下,在曲柄機 構7内裝有從手臂4前端部分之側表面向外突出的天平17。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 此外,針天心8係利用能夠朝垂直方向自由滑動的一 個方式裝於針天心擺動底座18内,針天心擺動底座18係利 用其上端部分隨著一根平行於上軸6、並作為其支點的擺 動支軸18a而自由擺動的一個方式建構而成。此外,拉力 組塊1 9係配置在手臂4前端部分之侧表面的下方部分中, 而拉力組塊19係建構成其拉力能夠藉由音頻線圈馬達6 〇控 制而變化。 在垂直本體3内部配置有進給馬達2〇,其係作為以電 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公髮〉 A7 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 _________B7____._ 五、發明說明(16 ) 動方式驅動布料固定板14及壓布機15的電動裝置,進給馬 達20係一具脈衝馬達,其轴朝垂直方向延伸;此外還建構 了進給機構21,自進給馬達2G之輸出軸延伸至布料固定板 14及壓布機15。 此外,在手臂4前端部分上面裝有裁布刀氣缸元件3〇 ’作為裁布刀裁剪操作的電動裝置,刀具安1板31能夠藉 由裁布刀氣缸元件30驅動而上下移動,並能夠於手臂4内 朝垂直方向延伸。裁布刀16係利用—根固定螺桿32安裝於 刀具安裝板31之下端部分,而刀具安裝板31之下端部分則 自手臂4向下突出。 順便提一下,如第13圖中所示,有一個供將刀具安裝 板31提起並回復至其原來位置的復位彈簧33連接至刀具安 裝板31;此外,在刀具安裝板31侧端上面配置有閉路型式 的上下裁布位置偵測感測器34a及34b ,分別用以偵測刀具 安裝板3 1之欲偵測部分3 1 a。 再者’垂直本體部分3内配置有基線馬達4〇,用以判 定針天心擺動底座18之基線位置’以及配置有擺動寬度馬 達41,用以判定其擺動寬度。基線馬達4〇與擺動寬度馬達 41兩者均為脈衝馬達’其每個均具有一條與上軸6平行而 水平延伸的轴’並建構有缝針擺動機構42,自基線馬達4〇 與擺動寬度馬達41之各輸出軸延伸至針天心擺動底座18。 現在,如第2圖中所示,進給機構21包括有一根朝水 平方向延伸之進給軸22、一個用於布料固定板14的托架23 、一根用以固定壓布機15的布料固定手臂24,以及類似製 本紙張尺度適用申國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公复 1 19 ----- I I I I Ί I Λ、-裝· I I ---訂--I I I I I l· ?* (請先閱讀背面之"意事項再填寫本頁) 五、發明說明(17 ) 置。利用过種方式,建構有從推仏I、本 定 ,從進給馬達2〇延伸至布料固 板24的連結裝置。 也就是說,於垂直本體部分3内裝有進給轴22,其具 有一根齒條22a’以喃合方式與配置在進給馬達2〇之輸出 轴上面的-個小齒輪咬合’而於布料固定板14下端部分用 以支撐該布料gj定板之托架23上端部㈣、較於自垂直本 趙部分3突出、並位於手臂4下方的進給轴”中間部分。布 料固定手臂24之底部包括有一個安裝件”,用以支撐壓布 器ι5的前端部分,並利用以一根拖軸24a為其支點朝垂 直方向自由擺動的-個方式接於托架23下方部分之側表面 雖然並未示出,<旦是卻g己4 了—個用以舉起布料固定 手臂4之促動器(氣缸、螺線管或類似裝置),以及一個供 將固定臂24降至初始位置的復位彈簧。然而,布料固定手 臂24之垂直移動可藉由踏板之操作而完成。 此外’提供了 -個閉路型式的初始位置偵測感測器% ,以根據進給軸22之位置測出刀具前端位置的一個初始對 應位置。 藉由上述結構之進給機構21,當具有一脈衝馬達之進 給馬達20被驅動時,布料固定板14與壓布機15透過進給軸 22以整體方式於底座2上面移動,其等能夠藉由小齒輪 與齒條22a之間的嚙合以及透過托架23和布料固定手臂μ 而來回移動。 上述裝置為用於本實施例中,以電動方式移動之裝 402648To ----- 广 、-装 --------- Order --------- Μ {Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page} A7 B7 40 ^ 649 V. Description of the invention (Fig. 106 is a perspective view providing the structure of a needle position sensor; Fig. 107 (A) is an operation time chart of the thread cutting mechanism of the present invention, and Fig. 107 (B) is the present invention An operation time chart of another embodiment of the thread cutting mechanism; and FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram of the moving positions of the pair of upper suture scissors of the above embodiment. ≪ First Embodiment > First, the FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the appearance of the buttonhole darning sewing machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the outline of the internal mechanism of the first embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a view from FIG. 2 On the opposite side, a perspective view of the internal mechanism is shown. In Figures 1 to 3, the reference characters are as follows: 丨 is the sewing machine frame, 5 is the sewing machine motor, 6 is the upper shaft, 7 is the crank mechanism, and 8 is Needle Tianxin, 9 is the sewing needle, 10 is the vertical axis, u is the lower axis, 12 is the hook, 13 is the spool box, 14 is the cloth fixing plate, 15 is the pressure Cloth machine (frame-shaped plywood body), 16 is a cloth cutter (vertical moving tool), 17 is a balance, 18 is a needle balance center swing base, 19 is a tension block, 20 is a feed motor (electric device: pulse motor) '21 is the feed mechanism (connecting device), 30 is the cylinder element for the cloth cutter, 31 is the cutter mounting plate, 40 is the baseline motor, 41 is the swing width motor, 42 is the needle swing mechanism, and 60 is Audio coil motor. As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the sewing machine frame i includes a base 2 having a flat bottom surface on its upper surface 2, a vertical body portion 3 standing on one of the end portions of the base 2, and a configuration In the vertical body part 3, this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × 297 mm --I ----- 1 ----- pack-II (please read the precautions on the back first) Refill this page) Order d. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7-^ ------ B7___ V. An arm 4 on the description of the invention (15) that extends substantially parallel to the base 2 In addition, the sewing machine frame 1 is generally U-shaped from the side. ≫ II IIIJII _ ΙΛ, _-(Please read the note on the back-fill in this page again) In the above sewing machine frame 1, there is a sewing machine motor 5 arranged on the upper end of the vertical body part 3 side, the upper shaft 6 can It is driven and rotated by the sewing machine motor 5 and is disposed inside the arm 4. The needle core 8 is connected to the front end portion of the upper shaft 6 through the crank mechanism 7, and the needle 9 is mounted on the lower portion of the needle core 8. In addition, 'vertical The shaft 10 is arranged in the vertical body portion 3, the lower shaft ^ is arranged in the base 2, and the spool box 13 is mounted on the tension hook 12 arranged in the front end portion of the lower shaft u. Incidentally, the upper end portion of the vertical axis 10 is connected to the upper shaft 6 'through the helical gears 6a and 10a, and the lower end portion of the vertical shaft 10 is connected to the lower shaft 11 through the helical gears 1 Ob and 11a. -'Μ. Furthermore, a movable cloth fixing plate 14 is arranged on the base 2 and a cloth press 15 having a frame-shaped body portion and a cloth cutter 16 capable of moving vertically are arranged above the cloth fixing plate 14 . Incidentally, a balance 17 is provided in the crank mechanism 7 so as to protrude outward from the side surface of the front end portion of the arm 4. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs In addition, the Needle Heart 8 series is mounted in the Needle Heart swing base 18 in a way that can slide freely in the vertical direction. The swing shaft 18a which is the fulcrum of the upper shaft 6 and its fulcrum is constructed so that it may swing freely. In addition, the tension block 19 is arranged in the lower portion of the side surface of the front end portion of the arm 4, and the tension block 19 is constructed so that the tension can be changed by the audio coil motor 600 control. A feed motor 20 is arranged inside the vertical body 3, and it is printed as an electric paper sheet that conforms to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × X 297)> A7 A7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs _________ B7 ____._ 5. Description of the invention (16) The electric device that drives the cloth fixing plate 14 and the cloth press 15 in a dynamic manner, and the feed motor 20 is a pulse motor whose axis extends in the vertical direction; in addition, the feed is also constructed The mechanism 21 extends from the output shaft of the feed motor 2G to the cloth fixing plate 14 and the cloth press 15. In addition, a cloth cutter cylinder element 30 ′ is installed on the front end portion of the arm 4 as an electric device for the cloth cutting operation. The cutting tool mounting plate 31 can be moved up and down by driving the cutting knife cylinder element 30, and can extend in the vertical direction in the arm 4. The cutting knife 16 uses a fixed screw 32 to be installed on the lower end of the cutting tool mounting plate 31 Part, and the lower end part of the cutter mounting plate 31 projects downward from the arm 4. By the way, as shown in FIG. 13, there is a reset spring for lifting the cutter mounting plate 31 and returning it to its original position. The spring 33 is connected to the cutter mounting plate 31; in addition, a closed-circuit type upper and lower cutting position detection sensors 34a and 34b are arranged on the side end of the cutter mounting plate 31, respectively, for detecting the detection of the cutter mounting plate 31. The measuring part 3 1 a. Furthermore, a 'baseline motor 40 is arranged in the vertical body part 3 to determine the baseline position of the needle-centred swing base 18' and a swing width motor 41 is used to determine its swing width. The baseline motor Both the 40 and the swing width motor 41 are pulse motors, each of which has a shaft extending parallel to the upper shaft 6 and extends horizontally, and a stitch swing mechanism 42 is constructed. Since the baseline motor 40 and the swing width motor 41 Each output shaft extends to the needle-centre swing base 18. Now, as shown in FIG. 2, the feed mechanism 21 includes a feed shaft 22 extending horizontally, and a bracket 23 for the cloth fixing plate 14. 1. A cloth fixing arm 24 for fixing the cloth pressing machine 15 and similar paper sizes. Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 public reply 1 19 ----- IIII Ί I Λ,- Equipment II --- Order-IIIII l ・? * (Please read the "Italy" on the back before filling in this page) 5. Description of the invention (17). Using a variety of methods, the structure is constructed from the pusher I and the set, extending from the feed motor 20 to the cloth solid. The coupling device of the plate 24. That is, a feed shaft 22 is installed in the vertical body portion 3, and it has a rack 22a 'and a gear arranged on the output shaft of the feed motor 20 in a coupling manner. The pinion gear is engaged in the lower end of the cloth fixing plate 14 to support the upper end of the bracket 23 of the cloth gj fixed plate ㈣, which is more than the feed shaft protruding from the vertical main part 3 and located below the arm 4 " . The bottom of the cloth fixing arm 24 includes a mounting piece "for supporting the front end of the cloth presser 5 and is connected to the underside of the bracket 23 in a manner freely swinging in a vertical direction with a drag shaft 24a as its fulcrum Although the side surface of the part is not shown, < yes it is already 4-an actuator (cylinder, solenoid or similar device) for lifting the cloth to fix the arm 4, and a fixed arm The return spring which is lowered to the initial position. However, the vertical movement of the cloth fixing arm 24 can be completed by the operation of the pedal. In addition, a closed-circuit type initial position detection sensor% is provided to respond to the feed axis. An initial corresponding position of the front end position of the tool is measured at the position of 22. With the feed mechanism 21 having the above structure, when the feed motor 20 having a pulse motor is driven, the cloth fixing plate 14 and the cloth press 15 are fed through. The shaft 22 is moved above the base 2 in an integrated manner, and can be moved back and forth by the engagement between the pinion and the rack 22a and the fixed arm μ through the bracket 23 and the cloth. The above device is used in this embodiment For electric movement 402648

五、發明說明(18 ) (請先閱讀背面之-注意事項再填寫本頁) 也就是說,在一部鈕孔織補縫鲂機中,由於具有一個 透過進給機構21而驅動布料固定手臂24之進給馬達2〇係利 用上述方式安置於縫幼機機架丨的垂直本體部分3内,因此 垂直本體部分3内之空間可以有效地利用,而同時必須安 裝於縫紉機機架1外部上面之零件數目得以減少,使缝紉 機機架1之外觀能夠做作整齊而簡單。 此外’由於用以驅動布料固定手臂24之進給馬達2〇係 安置於垂直本體部分3内,不僅可提供一個充分的絕緣效 果’而且亦能改善布料之處理,其等依序能夠解決當馬達 女裝於縫初機機架外部時布料可能被污染之問題。 再者’由於脈衝馬達(進給馬達)20輸出轴之小齒輪2〇a 的轴係朝垂直方向延伸,並以嚙合方式和其轴朝水平方向 延伸之進給轴22的齒條22a咬合,且亦由於布料固定手臂24 係固定於進給軸22上’因此進給軸22能夠透過齒條20a和 小齒輪22a,藉由垂直延伸之脈衝馬達(進給馬達)2〇而朝 水平方向線性驅動或移動,使其能夠朝其中布料固定手臂 24接近而部分遠離垂直本體部分3的一個方向移動布料固 定手臂24。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 由於分別具有脈衝馬達之基線馬達40與擺動寬度馬達 41係利用將其軸配置成平行於底座2上表面而延伸的一個 方式安置於垂直本體部分3内,同樣地對進給馬達20而言 ,垂直本體部分3之内部空間可以有效地利用,而同時必 須安裝於縫紉機機架1外部上面之零件數目得以減少,而V. Description of the invention (18) (Please read the back-note before filling out this page) That is, in a buttonhole quilting machine, because it has a feed mechanism 21 to drive the cloth fixing arm 24 The feed motor 20 is arranged in the vertical body part 3 of the sewing machine frame in the manner described above. Therefore, the space in the vertical body part 3 can be effectively used, and at the same time, it must be installed on the outside of the sewing machine frame 1. The number of parts is reduced, making the appearance of the sewing machine frame 1 neat and simple. In addition, 'the feed motor 20 for driving the cloth fixing arm 24 is disposed in the vertical body part 3, which not only provides a sufficient insulation effect', but also improves the handling of the cloth, which can sequentially solve the problem of being a motor The women's clothing may be contaminated when sewing outside the machine frame. Furthermore, since the shaft system of the pinion 20a of the output shaft of the pulse motor (feed motor) 20 extends in the vertical direction, and meshes with the rack 22a of the feed shaft 22 whose shaft extends in the horizontal direction, And because the cloth fixing arm 24 is fixed on the feed shaft 22, the feed shaft 22 can pass through the rack 20a and the pinion 22a, and linearly horizontally by a pulse motor (feed motor) 20 extending vertically. Driven or moved so that it can move the cloth fixing arm 24 in a direction in which the cloth fixing arm 24 approaches and is partially away from the vertical body portion 3. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, since the baseline motor 40 and the swing width motor 41 each having a pulse motor are arranged in the vertical body portion 3 in a manner that their axes are arranged parallel to the upper surface of the base 2, Similarly for the feed motor 20, the internal space of the vertical body portion 3 can be effectively used, and at the same time, the number of parts that must be mounted on the outer surface of the sewing machine frame 1 is reduced, and

7T 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A7 B7 19 五、發明說明( 使縫幼機機架丨之外觀能夠作的整齊而簡單。 條基t二二第3-至5圖中所示縫針擺動機構42包括有一 擺凡 、一根基線槓桿44、一根連桿45、-根縫針 槓桿46、一根縫針擺動槓桿Ο、—根連接轴Μ、 二条:針振動手臂49、一個縫針擺動凸輪A—條擺動寬 度手#55、一根擺動寬度槓桿“以及類似裝置。 也就疋說’在垂直本體部分3内,有一個扇形齒輪W 配置在以水平支撐於縫匆機機架内的一根支撐輛…作為 其中間部分之支點的基線手臂43下端部分中並以喊合方 式和配置在基線馬達40輸出軸上面的—個小齒輪術咬合 ,且又形基線槓桿44之末端部分係以擺動方式藉由一根水 平樞軸44a接至基線手臂43上方部分的又形部分上而缝 針擺動凸輪槓桿46係以擺動方式藉由—根水平柩轴45a接 至連桿45的其他末端部分。 再者,縫針擺動槓桿47之前端部分係以擺動方式藉由 一根水平樞轴46a接至縫針擺動凸輪槓桿46之下端部分, 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 而縫針擺動槓桿47之底端部分被固定在平行於手臂4内之 上軸6而配置的連接轴48底端部分。此外,縫針擺動手臂 之底端部分被固定於連接軸48之前端部分,而針天心擺動 底座18係以擺動方式透過一個方形件(未示出)或類似裝置 接至縫針擺動手輩49之前端部分。 於此,縫針擺動凸輪槓桿46形成具有一個向上開啟的 U形嚙合凹進部分46b,而縫針擺動凸輪54包括有—個偏 心凸輪,與合凹進部分46b咬合》 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A77T This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) A7 B7 19 V. Description of the invention (Enables the appearance of the sewing machine frame to be neat and simple. The needle swing mechanism 42 shown in FIGS. 3 to 5 includes a pendulum, a baseline lever 44, a link 45, a needle lever 46, a needle swing lever 0, and a connecting shaft M, two: Needle vibrating arm 49, a stitch swing cam A-swing width hand # 55, a swing width lever "and similar devices. That is to say, 'In the vertical body part 3, there is a sector gear W arranged on a horizontal support A support vehicle in the sewing machine frame ... the lower end of the baseline arm 43 serving as the fulcrum of the middle portion is engaged in a shouting manner with a pinion gear disposed above the output shaft of the baseline motor 40, and again The end portion of the base line lever 44 is connected to the convex part of the upper part of the baseline arm 43 by a horizontal pivot 44a in a swinging manner, and the stitch rocker cam lever 46 is provided in a swinging manner by a horizontal cymbal 45a Connect to connecting rod 4 5. The other end of the needle swing lever 47 is connected to the lower end of the needle swing cam lever 46 in a swinging manner through a horizontal pivot 46a. The bottom end portion of the needle swing lever 47 is fixed to the bottom end portion of the connecting shaft 48 arranged parallel to the upper shaft 6 in the arm 4. In addition, the bottom end portion of the needle swing arm 47 is fixed to the front end portion of the connecting shaft 48, and The stitch center swing base 18 is swingably connected to the front end portion of the needle swing hand 49 through a square member (not shown) or the like. Here, the needle swing cam lever 46 is formed with a U-shaped engaging recess which opens upward. Into the part 46b, and the needle swing cam 54 includes an eccentric cam that engages the recessed part 46b. ”This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) A7

,队eg神;)j上面 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 本紙張尺度適用_家標準(CNS)A4規格⑽χ挪公^> ’其透過減速齒輪51及52可使上軸6之旋轉以1/2的—個減 速比傳動。 再者,於垂直本體部分3内,有一個扇形齒輪55b配置 在以水平支撐於縫紉機機架内的一根支撐轴55a作為其中 間部分之支點的擺動手臂55下端部分中,並以喷合方式和 配置在擺動寬度馬達41輸出軸上面的一個小齒輪41&咬么 ,且擺動寬度槓桿56之末端部分係以擺動方式藉由一根只 平極轴56a接至擺動寬度手臂55上方部分的又形部分上\ 擺動寬度槓桿56的另一端則以擺動方式藉由一根水平柜相 44a接至連桿45。 於基線手臂43之扇形齒輪43a的齒腹部分上面配置了 一個由磁性感測器形成的基線原點偵測感測器5 7,作為基 線位置偵測裝置,並於扇形齒輪43b的其中一個末端部^ 侧上面配置有一塊用於基線偵測之磁鐵。同樣地,於擺^ 寬度手臂55之扇形齒輪55b周圍配置了一個由磁性感測器 形成的擺動寬度原點偵測感測器58,作為縫針擺動寬度偵 測裝置,並於扇形齒輪55b的其中一個末端部分侧上面配 置有一塊用以偵測縫針擺動寬度的磁鐵。 此外,在位於副轴53側上面之減速齒輪52的其中一個 側表面上配置了-個由—塊磁性感測器形成之縫針擺動左 右側位置偵測感測器5 9 (基線側/縫針擺動侧偵測裝置卜 而減速齒輪52包括有一塊磁鐵52a,用以偵測左右位置。 當上軸6上面之減速齒輪51轉動兩次時,則減速齒輪52 -2Τ, Team eg god;) j The above printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is applicable to this paper. _Home Standard (CNS) A4 Specification ⑽χ Norwegian ^ > 'It can make the upper shaft 6 through reduction gears 51 and 52. The rotation is transmitted with a reduction ratio of 1/2. Furthermore, in the vertical body portion 3, a sector gear 55b is arranged in the lower end portion of the swing arm 55 with a support shaft 55a horizontally supported in the sewing machine frame as a fulcrum of the middle portion thereof, and spray-fitted. And a pinion 41 arranged on the output shaft of the swing width motor 41, and the end portion of the swing width lever 56 is connected to the upper portion of the swing width arm 55 by a flat pole shaft 56a in a swinging manner. The other end of the swinging lever 56 is connected to the connecting rod 45 in a swinging manner through a horizontal cabinet 44a. A baseline origin detection sensor 57 formed by a magnetic sensor is arranged on the flank portion of the sector gear 43a of the baseline arm 43 as a baseline position detection device, and at one end of the sector gear 43b A magnet for baseline detection is arranged on the upper part of the side. Similarly, a swing width origin detection sensor 58 formed by a magnetic sensor is arranged around the sector gear 55b of the swing width arm 55 as a stitch swing width detection device. A magnet is arranged on one end part side to detect the swing width of the needle. In addition, on one side surface of the reduction gear 52 located on the upper side of the countershaft 53, a needle swing formed by a magnetic sensor is positioned on the left and right side position detection sensors 5 9 (baseline side / stitch swing). The side detection device and the reduction gear 52 include a magnet 52a for detecting left and right positions. When the reduction gear 51 on the upper shaft 6 rotates twice, the reduction gear 52 -2T

A7 B7 五、發明說明(21 ) ι!!!Γιιλ 良 ί — ;.s ' (請先閲講背面之>£意事項再填寫本頁) 轉動一次,也就是說,當縫針9使其上下移動兩次時,則 減速齒輪52轉動一次。縫針擺動左右側位置偵測感測器59 於縫針9位於上方停止位置處並擺向基線側時的一個狀態 下係配置在磁鐵52a的反側。 利用上文所建構之縫針擺動機構42,則擺動作用可藉 由基線馬逹40及擺動寬度馬達41之傳動作用,透過基線手 臂43至基線槓桿44、或透過擺動寬度手臂55至擺動寬度槓 桿56而傳至針天心擺動底座18,基線馬達40及擺動寬度馬 達41兩者均由脈衝馬達形成,作為驅動裝置,且之後透過 連桿45、縫針擺動凸輪槓桿46、縫針擺動槓桿47、縫針擺 動手臂49以及縫針擺動凸輪54,使基線及擺動寬度能夠隨 著配置在針天心擺動底座18之上方部分内、並以其作為支 點的擺動支軸18a變化。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 也就是說,如第4圖中所示,且通常如第5圖中所示, 關於基線受到具有脈衝馬達之基線馬達40的驅動作用,擺 動作用經由基線手臂43、基線槓桿44、連桿45、縫針擺動 凸輪槓桿46、縫針擺動槓桿47、縫針擺動手臂49以及縫針 擺動凸輪54傳至針天心擺動底座18,而使針天心擺動底座 18能夠隨著配置在針天心擺動底座18之上方部分内、並以 其作為支點的擺動支轴18a而擺動,因而基線能夠加以變 化,這就是基線變化機構。 此外,關於擺動寬度,受到具有脈衝馬達之擺動寬度 馬達41的驅動作用,擺動作用經由擺動寬度手臂55、擺動 寬度槓桿56、連桿45、縫針擺動凸輪槓桿46、縫針擺動槓 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1Ά ___* A7 B7 五、 發明說明( 22 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 桿47、縫針擺動手臂49以及縫針擺動凸輪“傳至針 動底座,而使針天心擺動底座18能夠隨著配置在針天心 擺動底座18之上方部分内並以装 作為支點的擺動支轴l8a 而擺動,因而擺動寬度能夠加以變化, 乂雙化,xe就是縫針擺動寬 度變化機構。 於此,縫針擺動機構42係將擺動寬度擺動(增加)至左 侧使基線位置料-參考點的—個機構,#第6⑷圖中所 示,於縫針擺動機構42中,當縫針擺動凸輪54之凸輪頂端 部分位於基線側(於第6(a)圖中的右側)時,縫針的下降根 據基線手臂43之位置決定。 此外,如第6(b)圊中所示,當縫針擺動凸輪M之凸輪 頂端部分位於凸輪擺動寬度側(於第6(b)圖中的左側)時, 縫針的下降根據對基線位置之擺動寬度量決定。 而且,如第7圖中所示,基線位置之移動可藉由基線 手臂43之旋轉而完成。 此外,如第8圖中所示,擺動寬度之變化可藉由擺動 寬度手臂55之旋轉’透過基線槓桿44而完成。 現在,當進行縫紉時’若縫紉機馬達5被驅動,則上 轴6會旋轉’上轴6之旋轉透過減速齒輪51及52傳至副軸53 内之縫針擺動凸輪54,而使縫針擺動凸輪54以1/2的一個 減速比旋轉。縫針擺動凸輪槓桿46具有凸輪嚙合凹進部分 46b,與縫針擺動凸輪54咬合,使其能夠交互擺動,而且 ’縫針擺動凸輪槓桿46之交互擺動作用接著透過縫針擺動 槓桿47、連接軸48、縫針擺動手臂49以及縫針擺動凸輪54 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -----------广„ -裝.-------訂· (請_先閱讀背面之-注意事項再填寫本頁) A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 23五、發明說明() 傳至針天心擺動底座18。 因此,根據上述之基線與擺動寬度的改變,則針天心 擺動底座18隨著位於針天心擺動底座18之上端部分上面、 並以其為支點的擺動支軸18a交互地擺動,藉以在鈕孔織 補程序中形成平行部分(侧邊縫合部分)之縫線與密線部分 (密線縫合部分)。 而且,在上述根據作為基線調整手臂之基線手臂43的 角度而使基線移動之機構中,基線手臂43繞著一根單轴擺 動,而使基線移動量產生如與基線手臂43角度一致的第10 圖中實線所示之量,視基線馬連(脈衝馬達)40產生之輸出 脈衝數目而定。 此外同樣地,亦可得到如與擺動寬度手臂55之角度一 致的第11圊中實線所示之縫針擺動量,該手臂係作為擺動 寬度調整手臂’該擺動量視具有脈衝馬達之擺動寬度馬達 41產生之輸出脈衝數目而定。 相反地’利用上述之縫針擺動機構42,則關於基線馬 達40之輸出脈衝數目k〗、k2、kn·,、kn ’如第9圊中所示, 係經過修正使其等接近一條理想線段(第丨〇圖中繪示之虛 線)的脈衝數目,而同樣地,關於擺動寬度馬達41之輸出 脈衝數目h!、h、hw、hn係經過修正使其等接近一條理 想線段(第10圖中緣示之虛線)的脈衝數目。 其次,第12(a)圖繪示了鈕孔織補之各部分名稱,如 第12(a)圖中所示,鈕孔之左右侧分別稱為左侧平行部分( 左侧縫合部分)與右側平行部分(右侧縫合部分),而紐孔 適 度 尺 張 紙 本 97· (請先閲«-背面之\注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 訂1 _ --銹. A7 --------B7__ 五、發明說明f4 ) 之前後侧分別稱為第一密線部分(後側密線缝合部分)與第 二密線部分(前侧密線縫合部分)。 紐孔織補可利用上文所建構之鈕孔織補縫紉機,以兩 種方式選擇性地完成,也就是說,一為右旋縫合,而另一 種為左旋縫合。尤其是,如第12〇))圖中所示,右旋縫合 係於第二密線部分(前側密線缝合部分)之左侧開始,之後 ’分別依序完成左側平行部分(左侧縫合部分)、第一密線 β分(後侧密線缝合部分)、以及右侧平行部分(右侧縫合 部分),最後右旋缝合回到第二密線部分(前側密線縫合部 分)。另一方面,如第12(c)圖中所示,左旋缝合係於第二 密線部分(前側密線縫合部分)之右側開始,之後,分別依 序完成右側平行部分(右側缝合部分)、第一密線部分(後 侧密線縫合部分)、以及左側平行部分(左側縫合部分), 最後左旋縫合回到第二密線部分(前侧密線縫合部分)。 此外,在本實施例之鈕孔織補縫紉機中,裁布刀16於 藉由驅動第13圖中繪示之裁布刀氣缸元件3〇進行鈕孔織補 程序而形成鈕孔期間上下移動了許多次。 也就是說,如第14(a)圖中所示,布料藉由裁布刀16 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 I ^ I --- (炎先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) d. 之第一次向下移動而被裁剪一次,其次如第14(b)圖中所 示,布料朝第4圖中繪示的一個箭頭方向進給,之後,裁 布刀16再度向下移動’藉以形成具有預定長度&一個鈕孔 〇 由於裁布刀16之裁剪邊緣長度較鈕孔織補縫線之侧邊 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 402649A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (21) ι !!! Γιιλ 良 ί —; .s' (please read about the back > £ notes before filling out this page) Turn it once, that is, when the needle 9 makes it When it moves up and down twice, the reduction gear 52 rotates once. The needle swing left and right position detection sensors 59 are arranged on the opposite side of the magnet 52a in a state where the needle 9 is positioned at the upper stop position and swung to the baseline side. With the stitch swing mechanism 42 constructed above, the swing effect can be transmitted by the baseline stirrup 40 and the swing width motor 41 through the baseline arm 43 to the baseline lever 44 or the swing width arm 55 to the swing width lever 56 And transmitted to the needle tianxin swing base 18, both the baseline motor 40 and the swing width motor 41 are formed by pulse motors as driving devices, and then through the link 45, the needle swing cam lever 46, the needle swing lever 47, and the needle swing arm 49 and the needle swing cam 54 enable the base line and swing width to be changed with the swing support shaft 18a arranged in the upper portion of the needle center center swing base 18 and using the swing support shaft 18a as a fulcrum. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs That is, as shown in Figure 4, and usually as shown in Figure 5, the baseline is driven by the baseline motor 40 with a pulse motor, and the swinging effect passes through the baseline The arm 43, the baseline lever 44, the connecting rod 45, the needle swing cam lever 46, the needle swing lever 47, the needle swing arm 49, and the needle swing cam 54 are transmitted to the needle tianxin swing base 18, so that the needle tianxin swing base 18 can follow the configuration The baseline is able to be changed by swinging within the upper part of the needle-centered center swing base 18 and using the swing support shaft 18a as a fulcrum. This is the baseline change mechanism. In addition, the swing width is driven by a swing width motor 41 having a pulse motor. The swing effect is via a swing width arm 55, a swing width lever 56, a link 45, a needle swing cam lever 46, and a needle swing lever. National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1Ά ___ * A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (22 Printed lever 47, Needle swing arm 49, and Needle swing cam of the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy The base is moved so that the needle-centre swing base 18 can swing with the swing support shaft 18a provided as a fulcrum in the upper part of the needle-centre swing base 18, so the swing width can be changed. Needle swinging width changing mechanism. Here, the needle swinging mechanism 42 swings (increases) the swinging width to the left to make the baseline position-the reference point-a mechanism, as shown in # 6 第 in the needle swinging mechanism 42. When the top end of the cam of the needle swing cam 54 is on the baseline side (on the right side in Figure 6 (a)), the lowering of the needle according to the base The position of the arm 43 is determined. In addition, as shown in 6 (b) (i), when the cam tip portion of the needle swing cam M is on the cam swing width side (on the left side in FIG. 6 (b)), the needle is lowered. It is determined based on the amount of swing width to the baseline position. Moreover, as shown in Figure 7, the movement of the baseline position can be completed by the rotation of the baseline arm 43. In addition, as shown in Figure 8, the change in swing width can be The rotation of the swing width arm 55 is completed through the baseline lever 44. Now when sewing is performed, 'If the sewing machine motor 5 is driven, the upper shaft 6 is rotated' The rotation of the upper shaft 6 is transmitted to the reduction gears 51 and 52 to The needle swing cam 54 in the counter shaft 53 rotates the needle swing cam 54 at a reduction ratio of 1/2. The needle swing cam lever 46 has a cam-engaging recessed portion 46b that engages the needle swing cam 54 so that it can interact Swing, and the 'swinging action of the needle swing cam lever 46 is followed by the needle swing lever 47, the connecting shaft 48, the needle swing arm 49, and the needle swing cam 54. This paper size applies to China Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- Canton--Install .------- Order · (Please _ first read the notes on the back before filling (This page) A7 B7 Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives 23 V. Description of the invention () Passed to the needle Tianxin swing base 18. Therefore, according to the above baseline and swing width changes, the needle Tianxin swing base 18 follows The swing support shaft 18a, which is located on the upper end portion of the needle base center swing base 18 and uses it as a fulcrum, swings alternately, thereby forming a parallel portion (side stitching portion) of the suture and dense line portion (dense line) in the buttonhole weaving process. Thread stitching part). Furthermore, in the above-mentioned mechanism that moves the baseline based on the angle of the baseline arm 43 as the baseline adjustment arm, the baseline arm 43 swings about a single axis, so that the baseline movement amount is equal to the 10th angle of the baseline arm 43 The amount shown by the solid line in the figure depends on the number of output pulses generated by the baseline horse (pulse motor) 40. In addition, the amount of stitch swing as shown by the solid line in the 11th line corresponding to the angle of the swing width arm 55 can also be obtained. This arm is used as the swing width adjustment arm. The swing amount is determined by a swing width motor having a pulse motor. 41 depends on the number of output pulses generated. Conversely, 'using the above-mentioned stitch swing mechanism 42, the number of output pulses k, k2, kn ,, kn of the baseline motor 40 is shown in Fig. 9 (b), which is modified to make the etc. close to an ideal line segment ( The number of pulses in the dashed line shown in the figure), and the number of output pulses h !, h, hw, hn of the swing width motor 41 is similarly adjusted to make it close to an ideal line segment (Figure 10). The number of pulses). Secondly, Figure 12 (a) shows the names of the parts of the buttonhole darning. As shown in Figure 12 (a), the left and right sides of the buttonhole are called the left parallel part (left stitched part) and the right The parallel part (the right stitched part), and the buttonhole is moderately ruled on paper 97 · (please read «-the back of \ notes before filling this page) Staple 1 _ --rust. A7 ------- -B7__ 5. Description of the invention f4) The front and back sides are called the first dense line portion (rear dense line stitching portion) and the second dense line portion (front dense line stitching portion). Buttonhole darning can be selectively performed in two ways using the buttonhole darning sewing machine constructed above, that is, one is right-handed stitching and the other is left-handed stitching. In particular, as shown in the figure 12)), the right-handed suture begins on the left side of the second dense line portion (the front dense line suture portion), and then the left parallel portion (the left suture portion) is sequentially completed respectively. ), The first dense line β points (back dense line suture portion), and the right parallel portion (right suture portion), and finally right-handed suture back to the second dense line portion (front dense line suture portion). On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 12 (c), the left-handed suture begins on the right side of the second dense line portion (front dense line stitched portion), and then sequentially completes the right parallel portion (right stitched portion), The first dense line portion (back dense line stitching portion), and the left parallel portion (left stitching portion), and finally left-handed stitching returns to the second dense line portion (front dense line stitching portion). In addition, in the buttonhole darning sewing machine of this embodiment, the cloth cutter 16 is moved up and down many times during the formation of the buttonhole by driving the buttonhole darning procedure of the cloth cutter cylinder element 30 shown in FIG. 13. . In other words, as shown in Figure 14 (a), the cloth is printed with a cloth cutter. 16 I ^ I --- (Yan first read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) d. The first time it moves downwards and is cut once, and then as shown in Figure 14 (b), the cloth is fed in the direction of an arrow shown in Figure 4. After that, the cloth cutter 16 is turned again. 'Move down' to form a buttonhole with a predetermined length & because the cutting edge length of the cloth cutter 16 is longer than the side of the buttonhole darning seam This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ) 402649

五、發明說明(25 缝合部分長邊縫合部分長度一致的一個鈕孔,因此具有任 意長度之鈕孔可利用同一種裁布刀16形成。 因此,即使鈕孔長度改變,也不必更換裁布刀,或者 亦不需要製備各種與紐孔長度數目相當的裁布刀數量。 現在,第15圖為拉力組塊19結構的部分截面圖,其拉 力可由音頻線圈馬達60控制而加以變化,並繪示出其組裝 完成之狀態。 也就是說,有一個柱塞61配置在具有極佳線性特性的 一具音頻線圈馬達60内,並與一根於中間部分配置了一個 樞軸62a、並以其作為支點的槓桿62其中一個末端部分對 接,有一個軸承箱64與一根中空軸65裝配在與槓桿62的另 一個末端部分接觸之控制軸63上面,並有一對拉力盤66及 67以滑動方式裝配在中空軸65上面,藉以形成拉力組塊19 請 先- 閱 讀 面 之 注V. Description of the invention (25 stitching part A buttonhole with the same length on the long side stitching part, so a buttonhole with any length can be formed with the same cloth cutter 16. Therefore, it is not necessary to replace the cloth cutter even if the buttonhole length changes. Or, it is not necessary to prepare various numbers of cloth cutters corresponding to the number of button holes. Now, FIG. 15 is a partial cross-sectional view of the structure of the tension block 19, and the tension can be changed and controlled by the audio coil motor 60. That is to say, the assembly is completed. That is, a plunger 61 is arranged in an audio coil motor 60 having excellent linear characteristics, and a pivot 62a is arranged in the middle part with the plunger 61 as One end portion of the fulcrum lever 62 is abutted, a bearing box 64 and a hollow shaft 65 are assembled on the control shaft 63 which is in contact with the other end portion of the lever 62, and a pair of tension plates 66 and 67 are assembled in a sliding manner Above the hollow shaft 65 to form the tension block 19 Please read the note on the surface first

項> 再r 填、寫裝 本衣 頁I I訂 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 由於拉力組塊19係以此方式建構而成,因此必須作用 於一條上方縫線之拉力可根據音頻線圈馬達6〇之柱塞61壓 力(驅動力),透過控制軸63改變作用於中空軸65上面之該 對拉力盤66及67上而加以改變。 更具體地說,配置在手臂4内之拉力組塊19係由一對 内外盤66及67構成,而根據本實施例,具有一外盤之固定 盤67係裝配在中空軸65前端部分的凸緣侧上面,而由一内 盤構成之活動盤66係配置在固定盤67之反侧,並以活動方 本紙張尺度適財國國家標準(CNS)A4規格⑽χ 297公董) -2S- 40^649 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -----—__B7___ 五、發明說明(26 ) 式裝配在中空轴65上面。 而且,於中空轴65内部配置有—個接觸件66a,當其 以滑動方式插入中空轴65内部時,可被控制轴63之前端部 分壓住’而接觸件66a係與活動盤66一體成形。 在本實施例之另一方面,内盤66可作為一固定盤,而 外盤67可作為活動盤。在這種情況中,接觸件可與作為活 動盤之外盤一體成形,且控制軸63之前端部分可透過嚙合 或類似方式而接至接觸件,而使接觸件能夠被控制轴63拉 動。 於上述所建構之拉力組塊19中’中空軸65係以旋轉方 式由軸承箱64支撐’而軸承箱64則被插入並固定於手臂4 内形成的一個裝配孔上。 而且,被插入拉力組塊19之中空轴65内部的控制軸63 可藉由作為線性直流馬達、並具有低慣性馬達的一具音頻 線圈馬達60加以驅動。 此音頻線圈馬達60包括有一根形成磁性線圈之圓柱形 軛601、一根於軛601末端部分之内圓周上配置一塊永久磁 鐵的外才干602、一根具有整合在圓柱形輛601中央部分之鐵 芯的中心桿603、以及一個配置在中心桿603與外桿6〇2之 間的圓柱形活動線圈604。 此外’活動線圈604係由一根補償鋼管6〇5及配置在補 償鋼管605外圓周上面的一個線圈606構成,而活動線圈6〇4 更包括有利用一體成形方式配置在位於其前端部分之線圈 頭部中央部分内的柱塞61。 — — — — — — I! — —"I I I " (請先閲讀背面之·注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂· ;梦: -Γ , 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) *以- A7Item > Re-filling and writing this page II Order Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Since the tension block 19 is constructed in this way, the tension that must be applied to an upper stitch can be based on the audio The pressure (driving force) of the plunger 61 of the coil motor 60 is changed by changing the pair of tension disks 66 and 67 acting on the hollow shaft 65 through the control shaft 63. More specifically, the tension block 19 disposed in the arm 4 is composed of a pair of inner and outer disks 66 and 67, and according to the present embodiment, a fixed disk 67 having an outer disk is a projection fitted on the front end portion of the hollow shaft 65. Above the edge side, a movable plate 66 composed of an inner plate is arranged on the opposite side of the fixed plate 67, and the paper size of the paper is suitable for the national standard (CNS) A4 (⑽297) of the financial country -2S- 40 ^ 649 A7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ----__ B7___ V. Description of the invention (26) is assembled on the hollow shaft 65. Furthermore, a contact piece 66a is arranged inside the hollow shaft 65, and when it is slidably inserted into the hollow shaft 65, it can be partially pressed by the front end of the control shaft 63, and the contact piece 66a is integrally formed with the movable plate 66. In another aspect of this embodiment, the inner plate 66 can be used as a fixed plate, and the outer plate 67 can be used as a movable plate. In this case, the contact member may be integrally formed with the outer disk as a movable disk, and the front end portion of the control shaft 63 may be connected to the contact member by meshing or the like, so that the contact member can be pulled by the control shaft 63. In the tension block 19 constructed above, the 'hollow shaft 65 is supported by the bearing case 64 in a rotating manner', and the bearing case 64 is inserted and fixed in an assembly hole formed in the arm 4. Further, the control shaft 63 inserted into the hollow shaft 65 of the tension block 19 can be driven by an audio coil motor 60 as a linear DC motor and having a low inertia motor. The audio coil motor 60 includes a cylindrical yoke 601 forming a magnetic coil, an outer talent 602 arranged with a permanent magnet on the inner circumference of the end portion of the yoke 601, and an iron with a central portion integrated into a cylindrical car 601. The core has a central rod 603 and a cylindrical movable coil 604 disposed between the central rod 603 and the outer rod 602. In addition, the movable coil 604 is composed of a compensation steel pipe 605 and a coil 606 arranged on the outer circumference of the compensation steel pipe 605, and the movable coil 604 further includes a coil arranged at the front end portion by an integral molding method. Plunger 61 inside the central part of the head. — — — — — — I! — — &Quot; III " (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) Order ·; Dream: -Γ, This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications ( 210 X 297 mm) * with-A7

五、發明說明(27 ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 於上述所建構之音頻線圈馬連60中,有一個磁場從配 置在磁性線圈中心軸(鐵芯)603外圓周上面的外桿(永久磁 鐵)602作用在活動線圈604上,有一條控制電流在這種磁 場的作用下,從控制電流供應線圈(cc)供應至活動線圈( 線圈606)604,藉以產生一個推力(或吸力),使配置在線 圈頭部内之柱塞61前進,而使中空轴65内之控制轴63透過 槓桿62而向前(或向後)移動。 上述所建構之音頻線圈馬達6〇提供了下列數個特性: 也就是說’其電感很小且回應很快;由於僅以活動線圈604 作為活動元件,因此其慣性很小且反應很快;活動線圈6〇4 之吸力(或推力)為常數,與距離無關;以及吸力(或推力) 為線性,並能得到與一電流成線性比例的一個吸力(或推 力)。 由於音頻線圈馬達60具有上述之特性,因此若控制轴 63利用與活動線圈604—艎成形之柱塞61,透過槓桿62之 驅動而在中空轴65内向前(或向後)移動,則活動盤66可透 過接觸件66a而朝其轴向方向推動,藉以改變作用在活動 盤66與固定盤67之間的壓力,而使作用於通過拉力組塊i 9 之縫線的夾緊力能夠改變。也就是說,音頻線圈馬達60對 於上方縫線(縫針縫線)具有主動拉緊功能。 如上所述,由於拉力組塊1 9藉由音頻線圈馬達60而提 供主動拉緊功能’例如第16(a)圖中所示,在從第一條縫 線到其後數條縫線的一個初始縫合部分中,拉力組塊19係 由音頻線圈馬達60控制,而將幾乎為零的一個拉力作用於 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公愛) ------------Λ \ I ^--------^--------- (請先閲讀背面之"意事項再填寫本頁) 他649 A7 B7 28 五、發明說明( 上方缝線上,藉以能夠將上下縫線彼此完全連結,而使初 始縫合部分能夠以上下缝線充分平衡之捆繞縫線形式縫合 ,使其能夠防止上方縫線於上下缝線接好之後脫落的一個 模糊現象。 之後,雖然藉由拉力組塊19而作用於上方縫線之拉力 可於音頻線圈馬達60之控制下作適當的調整,然而左側平 行部分(左側縫合部分)係以珠狀縫線(浮雕缝線)之形式缝 合’第一密線縫合部分(後侧密線縫合部分)以捆繞縫線之 形式縫合,右側平行部分(右侧縫合部分)以珠狀縫線之形 式縫合,而第二密線縫合部分(前侧密線部分)以捆繞縫線 之形式縫合。 而且,如第16(b)圖中所示,當縫合程序回到第二密 線部分(前侧密線部分)之後,於密線縫合部分中,不僅在 音頻線圈馬達60之控制下由拉力組塊19作用於上方縫線之 拉力増加’使其能夠將下方縫線向上拉至上方縫線侧,而 且在裁剪程序中,藉由拉動下方縫線,則先前經過裁剪之 上方縫線的末端部分被拉向布料後方,藉以在縫針縫合寬 度變小的最後一根缝針内能夠避免任何縫線部分殘留在其 上侧的一個可能性。 現在,第32圖繪示了上方縫線剪刀與驅動該剪刀的一 個傳動機構,其中參考字元分別表示如下:81為一條手臂 82為一根轉軸、83為滾動接頭、84為槓桿、85為剪刀安 裝板、86為固定葉片、87為活動葉片、88為階式螺釘、 為裁線彈簧(張力彈簧)、而90為縫線固定彈簧。尤其是, /i. I · — —---— — --------- .1 (請先閲讀背面之-注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製V. Description of the invention (27) The Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs printed on the above-configured audio coil Malian 60. There is a magnetic field from an outer rod arranged above the outer circumference of the central axis (iron core) 603 of the magnetic coil ( A permanent magnet) 602 acts on the movable coil 604, and a control current is supplied from the control current supply coil (cc) to the movable coil (coil 606) 604 under the action of this magnetic field, thereby generating a thrust (or suction). The plunger 61 disposed in the coil head is advanced, and the control shaft 63 in the hollow shaft 65 is moved forward (or backward) through the lever 62. The audio coil motor 60 constructed above provides the following characteristics: That is, its inductance is small and it responds quickly; because it only uses the moving coil 604 as a moving element, its inertia is small and it responds quickly; activity The suction (or thrust) of the coil 604 is constant and has nothing to do with distance; and the suction (or thrust) is linear and can obtain a suction (or thrust) that is linearly proportional to an electric current. Because the audio coil motor 60 has the above-mentioned characteristics, if the control shaft 63 uses the plunger 61 formed with the movable coil 604— 艎, and is driven forward (or backward) in the hollow shaft 65 by the driving of the lever 62, the movable disk 66 The contact member 66a can be pushed in the axial direction to change the pressure acting between the movable plate 66 and the fixed plate 67, so that the clamping force acting on the suture passing through the tension block i9 can be changed. That is, the audio coil motor 60 has an active tension function for the upper stitches (needle stitches). As described above, since the tensioning block 19 provides an active tensioning function by the audio coil motor 60, for example, as shown in FIG. 16 (a), from the first suture to one of the subsequent sutures. In the initial stitching part, the tension block 19 is controlled by the audio coil motor 60, and a nearly zero tension is applied to this paper size. The Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) is applied. ---- -------- Λ \ I ^ -------- ^ --------- (Please read the "Italy" on the back before filling in this page) He 649 A7 B7 28 V. Description of the invention It is a blurring phenomenon after the connection. After that, although the pulling force acting on the upper suture by the pulling force block 19 can be appropriately adjusted under the control of the audio coil motor 60, the left parallel portion (left stitching portion) is Sew the 'first dense suture section in the form of beaded sutures (embossed sutures) The back dense stitching section) is stitched in bundles, the right parallel section (right stitching section) is stitched in the form of beaded stitches, and the second dense thread stitching section (front dense section) is bundled. In the form of wound stitches, as shown in Fig. 16 (b), after the stitching procedure returns to the second dense stitch portion (front dense stitch portion), not only the audio coil is used in the dense stitch stitching portion. Under the control of the motor 60, the pulling force acting on the upper suture by the pulling force block 19 is increased so that it can pull the lower suture up to the upper suture side, and during the cutting process, by pulling the lower suture, the previously passed The upper end of the stitching above the cut is pulled towards the rear of the fabric, so that the possibility of any stitches remaining on its upper side can be avoided in the last stitch with a narrower stitch width. Now, Figure 32 draws The upper suture scissors and a transmission mechanism driving the scissors are shown. The reference characters are as follows: 81 is an arm, 82 is a rotating shaft, 83 is a rolling joint, 84 is a lever, 85 is a scissors mounting plate, 86 Fixed blades, 87 are movable blades, 88 are step screws, are thread-cutting springs (tension springs), and 90 are suture-fixing springs. In particular, / i. I · — — --- — — ---- ----- .1 (Please read the note on the back-please fill out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

A7A7

Μ為剪刀安裝板與槓桿84-體成形,而固定葉㈣、活動 葉片87以及縫線固定彈簧90 —同形成用以裁剪及固定上方 縫線之上方縫線剪刀,並分別配置在剪刀安裝板85之 部分。 也就是說,固定葉片86係以螺釘固定在剪刀安裝板85 之前端部分上面’活動葉片87以旋轉方式利用階式螺釘88 裝配在固定葉片86之上表面上,並有一個小的突出部分… 配置在固定葉片86上面,面向活動葉片87内形成的一個弧 $孔87a。此外,缝線固定彈簧9〇係由階式螺釘88與小型 突出部分86a以防止旋轉的一個方式支撐著。 固定葉片86包括有一個葉片部分嶋,位於其前端部 分中;而活動葉片87亦包括有一個葉片部分⑺,位於其 前端部分中’並可重整於固定葉片86之葉片部分86b上面 。此外,活動葉片87於弧形孔87&的_個延伸部分上面更 包括有一個凸輪喘合部分87c。 裁線彈簧89係接至剪刀安裝板87。 於上述建構之裁線機構中,根據本發明之第32圖中所 示,如肖於裁線裝置之布料進給方向#動裝1,而非傳统 的一個切斷機架,其使用了 一具脈衝馬達8〇,轉軸82之軸 朝垂直方向延伸’並以旋轉方式裝配於㈣至脈衝馬達 輸出軸8〇a之手臂81的機架部分8U内,而槓桿84則透過一 個能夠繞著其水平轴自由旋轉的滚動接頭83裝配於轉轴Μ 上。 如上所述,藉由將脈衝馬達8〇接至上方缝線剪刀(包 本紙張尺度適用中關家標準(CNS)A4規格(21G X 297公爱Μ is formed by a scissors mounting plate and a lever 84-body, and fixed leaf blades, movable blades 87 and suture fixing springs 90 are formed together to cut and fix the upper suture scissors for upper sutures, and are respectively arranged on the scissors mounting plates Part of 85. In other words, the fixed blade 86 is fixed on the front end portion of the scissors mounting plate 85 with screws. The movable blade 87 is rotatably assembled on the upper surface of the fixed blade 86 with step screws 88, and has a small protruding portion ... It is arranged on the fixed blade 86 and faces an arc hole 87a formed in the movable blade 87. The suture fixing spring 90 is supported by a stepped screw 88 and a small protruding portion 86a so as to prevent rotation. The fixed blade 86 includes a blade portion 嶋 located in the front end portion thereof; and the movable blade 87 also includes a blade portion 位于 located in the front portion thereof and can be reformed on the blade portion 86b of the fixed blade 86. In addition, the movable blade 87 further includes a cam fitting portion 87c on the extension portion of the arc-shaped hole 87 &. The wire cutting spring 89 is connected to the scissors mounting plate 87. In the thread cutting mechanism constructed as described above, according to the thirty-second figure of the present invention, as shown in the cloth feeding direction of the thread cutting device # 动 装 1, instead of a traditional cutting frame, it uses a It has a pulse motor 80, the axis of the rotating shaft 82 extends in the vertical direction, and is rotatably assembled in a frame portion 8U of the arm 81 of the pulse motor output shaft 80a, and the lever 84 is passed through A rolling joint 83 that can rotate freely in the horizontal axis is mounted on the rotating shaft M. As mentioned above, by connecting the pulse motor 80 to the upper suture scissors (the paper size is in accordance with the Zhongguanjia Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21G X 297)

— [ — — — — — — I — I - I * f請先閲讀背面之生意事項再填寫本頁〕 -錚. . A7 402649 """〜 B7 五、發明說明(30 ) 括了固定葉片86、活動葉片87以及縫線固定彈黃9〇),則 形成了具有上述結構的傳動機構,且傳動機構可操作如下 〇 也就是說,如第107A及1〇8或33圖中所示當一縫合 週期完成之後,於加壓器上升及裁線程序下,上方縫線被 固定葉片86與活動葉片87裁煎,而接於縫針的裁剪端則備 固定在縫線固定彈簧90與活動葉片87之間。就在此縫線裁 剪程序之後,上方縫線被脈衝馬達8〇移動至其再處理位置 Yx並於該處等候。第108圖中的恢復位置分離位置以 及再處理位置係朝γ方向(布料進給方向)觀測而得。 於下一次縫紉機啟動時,手臂81由脈衝馬達8〇以上方 縫線剪刀能夠隨布料進給馬達(參看上述之進給機構21)之 運轉而同步移動某一距離I的一個方式朝Xcw方向轉動一 個特定角度,換言之,其大體上係與布料進給速度相同。 於是,槓桿84透過轉轴82與滾動接頭83而轉動,使上方縫 線剪刀向前移動至分離位置。當脈衝馬達8〇停止後,布料 固疋本體由布料進給馬達連續地移動,因此與傳統結構一 樣,上方縫線將脫離上方縫線末端。 之後,於一特定的時間點,上方縫線剪刀被脈衝馬達. 80移動至位於缝針垂直路徑外側的恢復位置,而上方縫線 剪刀維持在開啟狀態。此外’當縫合週期完成時,與傳統 結構一樣’由於加壓器上升及裁線之作用,上方縫線剪刀 係以剪刀橫跨縫針縫線路徑的一個方式移動,於是上方縫 線剪刀能夠切斷並固定住縫線。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) . -裝--------訂---------,€ t 9 (請先閲讀背面之-注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 31 五、發明說明( 利用此方式,藉由改變上方縫線剪刀隨布料進給馬達 之運轉同步移動之距離Y2(分離距離),則可改變打開上方 縫線剪刀(固定葉片86及活動葉片87)的時間。再者,即使 布料被布料進給馬達移動’丨方縫線剪W亦循著布料移動 ,使其能夠降低縫合起始位置到剪刀之間的縫線張力藉 以能夠鬆開縫線。 因此’如第34圖中所示’由於上方縫線剪刀係朝與布 料進給方向相同之方向移動,使其不僅能夠持續上方縫線 剪刀將上方縫線固定於活動葉片87與縫線固定彈簧9〇之間 的一個狀態,而且能夠降低上方縫線之張力,亦即鬆開上 方縫線。 這不僅能夠促使縫線於鈕孔織補程序中的第一階段平 行部分縫合期間上升,亦能使縫線於第一縫合階段充分地 形成。 另外,如第107Β圖中所示,脈衝馬達移動至再處理位 置的時間可設定為縫紉機開始運轉之時間,而脈衝馬達移 動至分離位置可由一定時器加以控制。 <第二項實施例> 第17圖繪示了 一進給機構的第二項實施例,尤其是, 第17圖與第2圖類似’為第二項實施例之内部機構的一個 通用透視圖。 於第17圖中’與第2圖中類似之元件被賦予相同之名 稱’而其敘述則予以省略。此處,下文中僅敘述與第2圖 中結構不同之元件。 I X 297公釐) -----V ' I · I-----—訂 -----1!·'^、 * (請先閱讀背面之-注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -5Τ 40S649 A7 _ ______ B7 五、發明說明() 也就是說,根據第二項實施例,如第17圖中所示,於 進給機構21内’進給馬達20之輪出轴的轴係朝水平方向延 伸’並直接與根和進給馬達20輸出轴同轴的進給轴連接 ,且形成有一根進給螺桿27,並有一個托架23以嚙合方式 藉由一球形螺桿機構而和進給螺桿27咬合。 如上所述,由於脈衝馬達(進給馬達)2〇之輸出轴的軸 係朝水平方向延伸,並直接與同軸之進給軸22連接,布料 固定手臂24則以嚙合方式透過使用進給螺桿及滚珠的進給 球形螺桿機構而與進給軸22咬合,因此與前述之第一項實 施例類似,不僅能夠得到由於將進給馬達2〇置入垂直本體 部分3内所提供的一個效果,而且當進給馬達2〇由脈衝馬 達20驅動而使和水平配置之脈衝馬達(進給馬達)2〇直接連 接的進給軸22朝水平方向線性移動時,布料固定手臂24可 透過使用進給螺桿27及滾珠的進給球形螺桿機構,相對於 垂直本體部分3而朝逼近與分開方向移動。 <第三項實施例> 第18圊繪示了進給機構的第三項實施例,尤其是,第 1 8圖與第2圖類似,為第三項實施例之内部機構的一個通 用透視圖。 於第18圖中,與第2圓中類似之元件被賦予相同之名 稱’而其敘述則予以省略。此處,下文中僅敛述與第2圖 中結構不同之元件。 也就是說,根據第三項實施例,如第18圖中所示,於 進給機構21内’有一個圓柱形有槽凸輪28固定於進給馬達 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) — — — — — — — — — — — l· I · I ... (請t閲讀背面之-注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 五、 發明說明( 33 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 20之輸出軸上,其軸則朝水平方向延伸,且其上面配置之 嚙合樞軸22b從進給軸22之外圓周突出,並與沿著圓柱形 有槽凸輪28之外圓周而形成的一個凸輪槽28a咬合。 如上所述’由於進給馬達2〇之輸出轴上面的圓柱形有 槽凸輪28内形成之凸輪槽2 8a的軸係朝水平方向延伸,並 與配置在具有水平延伸軸之進給轴22上面的嚙合樞轴22b 咬合,且布料固定手臂24固定於進給轴22上,因此和前述 之第一項實施例一樣,不僅能夠得到由於將進給馬達2〇置 入垂直本體部分3内所提供的一個效果,而且當進給轴22 由朝水平方向延伸之脈衝馬達(進給馬達)2〇驅動時,進給 轴22能透過具有環形有槽凸輪28及嚙合樞軸22b的進給凸 輪機構而朝水平方向線性地移動,使布料固定手臂24能夠 相對於垂直本體部分3而朝逼近與分開方向移動。 <第四項實施例> 第19圖繪示了進給機構的第四項實施例,尤其是,第 19圖與第2圖類似,為第四項實施例之内部機構的一個通 用透視圖。 ,於第19圖中,與第2圖中類似之元件被賦予相同之名 稱而其敘述則予以省略。此處,下文中僅敛述與第2圖 中結構不同之元件。 也就是說,根據第四項實施例,如第18圖中所示,於 進給機構21内,並不使用具有一脈衝馬達之進給馬達2〇, 而是使用具有-線性步進馬達的—具進給馬達29,該馬達 具有根輸出軸,其軸朝水平方向延伸,並驅動輸出軸使 本紙張尺度_中關家標準(Ci^4規格⑽χ撕公复·γ II I I J I I I I 1/ ' ·1111111 «— .— — — — — I— - (請先閱讀背面之.注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 -------B7___ 五、發明說明(34 ) 其前進與後退,而進給軸22與具有這種線性步進馬達之進 給馬達的輸出轴連接。 如上所述’由於線性步進馬達(進給馬達)2〇之前進及 後退輸出轴的軸係朝水平方向延伸,並直接與和馬達2〇之 輸出軸同軸的進給軸22連接,且布料固定手臂24係固定於 進給軸22上’因此和前述之第一項實施例一樣,不僅能夠 得到由於將進給馬達20置入垂直本體部分3内所提供的一 個效果’而且若由水平配置之線性步進馬達(進給馬達)2〇 驅動時’則與步進馬達20直接連接之進給轴22可朝水平方 向移動,而使布料固定手臂24能夠相對於垂直本體部分3 而朝逼近與分開方向移動。 <第五項實施例> 第20圖繪示了缝針擺動機構的另一項實施例,亦即本 發明之第五項實施例,且與第2圖一樣,第20圖為本縫針 擺動機構之内部機構的一個圖解透視圖。 於第20圖中,與第3圖中類似之元件被賦予相同之名 稱,而其敘述則予以省略。此處,下文中僅敘述與第3圖 中結構不同之元件。 也就是說’根據第五項實施例,如第2〇圖中所示,於 縫針擺動機構42内使用了 一具基線馬達4〇和一具擺動寬度 馬達41,其軸分別與上軸6相交成直角,並朝水平方向延 伸’基線馬達40與擺動寬度馬達41之各自輪出軸上面分別 形成蝸桿4〇b及41b,有一個扇形齒輪43d於一條基線手臂43 之下端部分中形成,並以嚙合方式和基線馬達4〇之蜗桿4〇b — JI! A ·裝 ------—訂---------分 * (請先閲讀背面之 >注意事項再填寫本頁)— [— — — — — — — I — I-I * f Please read the business matters on the back before filling out this page]-铮.. A7 402649 " " " ~ B7 V. Description of Invention (30) The fixed blade 86, the movable blade 87, and the suture fixed elastic yellow 90) form a transmission mechanism with the above structure, and the transmission mechanism can be operated as follows. That is, as shown in Figs. 107A and 108 or 33. It shows that after a stitching cycle is completed, the upper stitches are cut by the fixed blade 86 and the movable blade 87 under the ascending and trimming procedures of the pressurizer, and the cutting end connected to the needle is prepared to be fixed to the stitch fixing spring 90 and Between movable blades 87. Immediately after this stitch cutting procedure, the upper stitch is moved to its reprocessing position Yx by the pulse motor 80 and waits there. The recovery position separation position and reprocessing position in Fig. 108 are obtained by observing in the γ direction (feed direction of the cloth). The next time the sewing machine is started, the arm 81 is rotated by a pulse motor 80 and the upper stitching scissors can move synchronously a certain distance I in the direction of Xcw in accordance with the operation of the cloth feed motor (see the above-mentioned feed mechanism 21). A specific angle, in other words, it is about the same as the cloth feed speed. Then, the lever 84 is rotated through the rotating shaft 82 and the rolling joint 83 to move the upper suture scissors forward to the separated position. When the pulse motor 80 is stopped, the cloth fixing body is continuously moved by the cloth feeding motor, so the upper suture will be separated from the upper suture end like the conventional structure. Thereafter, at a specific point in time, the upper suture scissors are moved by the pulse motor. 80 to a recovery position outside the vertical path of the needle, and the upper suture scissors are maintained in an open state. In addition, 'When the stitching cycle is completed, it is the same as the traditional structure'. Due to the pressure riser and cutting effect, the upper suture scissors move in a way that the scissors cross the stitch suture path, so the upper suture scissors can cut off. And hold the sutures. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm). -Packing -------- Order ---------, € t 9 (Please read the -Notes, please fill out this page again) Printed by A7 31, Consumer Cooperatives, Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention Distance), you can change the time to open the upper suture scissors (fixed blade 86 and movable blade 87). Furthermore, even if the fabric is moved by the fabric feed motor, the square stitch cutter W will follow the fabric to make it able to move. Lowering the tension of the suture between the starting position of the suture and the scissors can loosen the suture. Therefore, as shown in Figure 34, the upper suture scissors move in the same direction as the feed direction of the cloth, making it not only The upper suture scissors can continuously fix the upper suture in a state between the movable blade 87 and the suture fixing spring 90, and can reduce the tension of the upper suture, that is, release the upper suture. This can not only promote the sewing Thread in buttonhole darn The rise of the parallel part of the first stage during the stitching can also make the suture fully formed in the first stitching stage. In addition, as shown in Figure 107B, the time for the pulse motor to move to the reprocessing position can be set as the time when the sewing machine starts to run. The moving of the pulse motor to the disengaged position can be controlled by a timer. ≪ Second Embodiment > Fig. 17 shows a second embodiment of a feed mechanism, in particular, Fig. 17 and Fig. 2 The diagram similar to 'is a general perspective view of the internal mechanism of the second embodiment. In FIG. 17,' the components similar to those in FIG. 2 are given the same name 'and the description is omitted. Here, hereinafter Only the components that differ from the structure in Figure 2 will be described. IX 297 mm) ----- V 'I · I -----— Order ----- 1! ·' ^, * (Please read first On the back-matters needing attention, please fill out this page again) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy -5T 40S649 A7 _ ______ B7 V. Description of the invention () That is, according to the second embodiment, as shown in Figure 17 The shaft system of the wheel of the feed motor 20 in the feed mechanism 21 is shown. It extends horizontally and is directly connected to the feed shaft coaxial with the output shaft of the root and the feed motor 20, and is formed with a feed screw 27, and a bracket 23 in a meshing manner with a ball screw mechanism and feeds The screw 27 is engaged. As described above, since the output shaft of the pulse motor (feed motor) 20 extends horizontally and is directly connected to the coaxial feed shaft 22, the cloth fixing arm 24 meshes through the use of the feed screw and The ball feed ball screw mechanism is engaged with the feed shaft 22, so similar to the first embodiment described above, not only can an effect provided by placing the feed motor 20 in the vertical body portion 3, but also When the feed motor 20 is driven by the pulse motor 20 and the feed shaft 22 directly connected to the horizontally arranged pulse motor (feed motor) 20 moves linearly in the horizontal direction, the cloth fixing arm 24 can pass through the use of the feed screw 27 and the ball feed ball screw mechanism move toward and away from the vertical body portion 3. < Third Embodiment > Fig. 18A shows a third embodiment of the feeding mechanism. In particular, Fig. 18 is similar to Fig. 2 and is a general purpose of the internal mechanism of the third embodiment. perspective. In Fig. 18, elements similar to those in the second circle are given the same name 'and their descriptions are omitted. Here, only the components different from the structure in Fig. 2 will be described below. That is, according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, a cylindrical slotted cam 28 is fixed in the feed mechanism 21 to the feed motor. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4. Specifications (210 X 297 mm) — — — — — — — — — — — l · I · I ... (Please read the note on the back-please fill in this page again) Order-Consumption by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Cooperative printed A7 V. Description of invention (33 On the output shaft printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the consumer cooperative printed on the output shaft 20, the shaft extends horizontally, and the above-mentioned meshing pivot 22b is located outside the feed shaft 22 It protrudes circumferentially and engages a cam groove 28a formed along the outer circumference of the cylindrical grooved cam 28. As described above, 'cause the cam formed in the cylindrical grooved cam 28 above the output shaft of the feed motor 20 The shaft of the groove 28a extends in the horizontal direction and engages with the engagement pivot 22b disposed on the feed shaft 22 having the horizontally extending shaft, and the cloth fixing arm 24 is fixed on the feed shaft 22, so it is the same as the first Like one embodiment, Not only can an effect provided by placing the feed motor 20 in the vertical body portion 3 be obtained, but also when the feed shaft 22 is driven by a pulse motor (feed motor) 20 extending horizontally, the feed shaft 22 can be linearly moved in the horizontal direction through a feed cam mechanism having an annular grooved cam 28 and an engagement pivot 22b, so that the cloth fixing arm 24 can move toward and away from the vertical body portion 3. < 第Four Embodiments> Fig. 19 shows the fourth embodiment of the feeding mechanism. In particular, Fig. 19 is similar to Fig. 2 and is a general perspective view of the internal mechanism of the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 19, components similar to those in FIG. 2 are given the same names and their descriptions are omitted. Here, only the components having different structures from those in FIG. 2 will be summarized below. That is, according to FIG. The four embodiments, as shown in FIG. 18, do not use a feed motor 20 having a pulse motor in the feed mechanism 21, but use a feed motor 29 having a -linear stepping motor. , The motor has a root output shaft Its axis extends in the horizontal direction and drives the output shaft to make this paper scale _Zhongguanjia standard (Ci ^ 4 specification 撕 χ 撕 公 复 · γ II IIJIIII 1 / '· 1111111 «—. — — — — — I —-( Please read the back. Please note before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ------- B7___ V. Description of the invention (34) Its forward and backward, and the feed axis 22 and The output shaft of a feed motor with such a linear stepping motor is connected. As mentioned above, 'Because the linear stepping motor (feed motor) 20, the shaft system of the input shaft and the backward output shaft extends horizontally, and directly connects with and The output shaft of the motor 20 is connected to the coaxial feed shaft 22, and the cloth fixing arm 24 is fixed to the feed shaft 22 '. Therefore, as with the first embodiment described above, not only can the feed motor 20 be inserted An effect provided in the vertical body portion 3 'and if driven by a horizontally arranged linear stepper motor (feed motor) 20', the feed shaft 22 directly connected to the stepper motor 20 can move in the horizontal direction, While the fabric holds the arm 24 can be moved toward and away from the vertical body portion 3. < Fifth Embodiment > Fig. 20 shows another embodiment of the needle swing mechanism, which is the fifth embodiment of the present invention, and is the same as Fig. 2. Fig. 20 is the sewing needle. A diagrammatic perspective view of the internal mechanism of the swing mechanism. In Fig. 20, components similar to those in Fig. 3 are given the same names, and descriptions thereof are omitted. Here, only the components having a structure different from that in FIG. 3 will be described below. That is, according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, a baseline motor 40 and a swing width motor 41 are used in the needle swing mechanism 42, and the axes thereof intersect the upper shaft 6 respectively. At right angles and extending horizontally, the worms 40b and 41b are formed on the respective output shafts of the baseline motor 40 and the swing width motor 41, and a sector gear 43d is formed in the lower end portion of a baseline arm 43. Engagement method and worm 4ob of the baseline motor 4o — JI! A · Installation ------------ Order --------- minutes * (Please read the > notes on the back before filling (This page)

餒濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 402649 五、發明說明(35 ) 咬合,並有一個扇形齒輪5 5d於一條擺動寬度手臂55之下 端4分中形成,以响合方式和擺動寬度馬達41之螞桿41b 咬合。 利用這種方式’於鈕孔織補縫紉機中,由於基線馬達 40和擺動寬度馬達41係分別由脈衝馬達構成,兩者均安置 於垂直本體部分3内,且其軸係與底座2之上表面平行,因 此和刖述之第一項實施例一樣,不僅垂直本體部分3内的 空間可以有效地利用,而且必須安裝於縫紉機機架丨外側 分上面的元件數目得以減少,而使縫紉機機架之外觀能 夠整齊。 <第六項實施例> 第21圖繪示了縫針擺動機構的另一項實施例,亦即本 發明之第六項實施例’且與第3圖一樣,第20圖為本縫針 擺動機構之内部機構的一個圖解透視圖。 於第21圖中’與第3圈中類似之元件被賦予相同之名 稱’而其敘述則予以省略。此處,下文中僅敘述與第3圖 中結構不同之元件。 也就是說,根據第六項實施例,如第21圖中所示,於 縫針擺動機構42内使用了 一具基線馬達4〇和一具擺動寬度 馬達41 ’其轴分別與上軸6相交成直角,並朝水平方向延 伸’而圓柱形有槽凸輪70及71則分別接於基線馬達40與擺 動寬度馬達41之輸出軸。而且,有一個嚙合柩軸43e配置 在基線手臂43之下端部分,並與基線馬達4〇之有槽凸輪7〇 外圓周内形成的一條凸輪槽7〇a咬合,而有一個嚙合樞軸 本紙張尺度_巾國國家標準(CNS)A4規-格⑵〇 X 297公爱) 1----裝--------訂---------r * (請先閲讀背面之.注意事項再填寫本頁) A7 402649 五、發明說明(’ 55e配置在擺動寬度手臂55之下端部分,並與擺動寬度馬 達41之有槽凸輪71外圓周内形成的一條凸輪槽咬合。 利用這種方式,於鈕孔織補縫紉機中,由於基線馬達 40和擺動寬度馬達41係分別由脈衝馬達構成,兩者均安置 於垂直本體部分3内,且其軸係與底座2之上表面平行,因 此和前述之第一項實施例一樣,不僅垂直本體部分3内的 二間可以有效地利用,而且必須安裝於縫紉機機架丨外侧 部分上面的元件數目得以減少,而使縫紉機機架之外觀能 夠整齊。 <第七項實施例> 第22圖轉^ 了裁布刀傳動機構的另一項實施例,其係 本發明之第七項實施例,而且,第22圖為本裁布刀傳動機 構的-個透視圖,其中裁布刀係藉由一種機械傳動機構而 上下移動,尤其是使用了日本專利出版編號第7 14438號 中所發表的.一個機構。 於第22圖巾’與第13圖中類似之元件被賦予相同之名 稱’而其敘述則予以省略。此處,下文中僅钦述與第13圖 中結構不同之元件。 也就是說,根據第七項實施例,如第22圖中所示有 一塊具有一把裁布刀16之刀具安裝板31透過一根連桿35b 而接於軸接在一根軸35a上的傳動桿35其中一個末端部分 而與條刀具傳動手臂36嚙合的—個傳動鉤37係以旋轉 ”支撐於傳動桿35的另一個末端部分上面。刀具傳動手 #36能夠上下移動,亦即與上轴6連接*朝第2頂中繪示 . 一,裝.-------訂---------Γ f靖4?閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 私紙張尺度適財關豕標準(CNS)A4規格⑵f x 297公釐) --39 37 A7 37 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明( 的-個箭頭A之方向移動。另一方面,刀具傳動釣37於其 上端部分内具有—個响合凹部37a,與刀具傳動手臂%咬 合’且其通常由-根彈簧37b供應能量並順時針旋轉。 而且,於上述之刀具傳動手臂36與傳動鉤η下方配置 了根啟動桿38及推桿39。啟動桿能夠與配置在缝紉機内 的個啟動機架(未示出)連接,並朝第22圖中的一個箭頭 B所不之方向移動。另一方面,推桿30係位於上述之底座 2内,且由於和能夠與上軸6連在一起轉動的一個主凸輪π 上面形成之切口 72a嚙合,故能夠上下移動。 此外,啟動桿38上方配置了 一條啟動手臂73,於啟動 時,此啟動手臂73可藉由啟動桿38而朝箭頭B方向移動, 而當縫紉機停止時能夠朝相反方向移動,而與配置在刀具 傳動釣37内的-根樞軸咬合,藉以防止刀具傳動釣”旋轉 再者於推桿39上方配置了一個凸輪控制機構74»凸 輪控制機構74與垂直移動之推桿39連接,使傳動鉤37繞著 一根作為傳動桿35與傳動鉤37之間的一個接點之軸旋轉。 根據上述之裁布刀傳動機構,若縫紉機被驅動,則與 啟動機架(未示出)連接之啟動桿38會朝箭頭8之方向移動 ,因而啟動手臂73繞著軸73a逆時針旋轉,使啟動手臂73 脫離刀具傳動鉤37之樞軸37c。有鑑於此,刀具傳動鉤37 的一個突出部分37d與凸輪控制機構74咬合’而由於凸輪 控制機構74之運轉,使刀具傳動鉤37處於可旋轉的一個狀 態,鈕孔織補程序於此旋轉狀態中進行,而在該過程中, 本紙張尺度適財國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公楚) — — — — — — ΊΙΙΙ — 1- ΐ · 11. (請七閲讀背面之-注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂. A7 五 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 費 合 、發明說明(38 ) 推桿39由於和與上軸6連在一起轉動之主凸輪以面形成 的切口 72a嚙合’故能夠朝垂直方向移動。 請 先. 閲 —而且,由於凸輪控制機構74之運轉,刀具傳動鉤37繞 著藉由彈簧37b之力量驅動而旋轉的轴37e順時針轉動,而 使刀具傳動鉤37之嚙合凹部37a與刀具傳動手臂邗之垂直 移動前端部分咬合。 也就是說,由於傳動桿35被迫使繞著軸35a擺動,因 此裁布刀16於特定之時間上下移動,藉以裁出特定部分的 布料並形成一個鈕孔,而結束鈕孔織補程序。 <第八項實施例> 訂 第23圖繪示了裁布刀傳動機構的另—項實施例,其係 本發明之第八項實施例,而且,第23圖為用以驅動一把裁 布刀之傳動系統的—個透視圖。 於第23圖中,與第13圖中類似之元件被賦予相同之名 稱,而其敘述則予以省略。此處,下文中僅敘述與第叫 中結構不同之元件。 也就是說,根據第八項實施例,如第23圖中所示,有 一塊具有一把裁布刀16之刀具安裝板31配置在軸接於—根 軸35a上的傳動桿35其中一個末端部分,而與一條刀具傳 動手臂36嚙合的一個傳動鉤37則配置在傳動桿35的另—個 末端部分上面。刀具傳動手臂36可與上軸6相連而上下移 動。另一方面,刀具傳動鉤37於其中央部分内具有一個嚙 合凹部37a’與刀具傳動手臂36咬合,且其通常由一根彈 簧37b供應能量並順時針旋轉。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 402649 V. Description of the invention (35) Occlusion and a sector gear 5 5d formed in 4 points below the lower end of a swing-width arm 55, and the swing-width motor 41 The ant 41b bites. In this way, in a buttonhole darning sewing machine, since the baseline motor 40 and the swing width motor 41 are constituted by pulse motors respectively, both are disposed in the vertical body portion 3, and the shaft system thereof is parallel to the upper surface of the base 2 Therefore, as with the first embodiment described above, not only the space in the vertical body portion 3 can be effectively used, but also the number of components that must be installed on the outer frame of the sewing machine can be reduced, so that the appearance of the sewing machine frame can be reduced. Be neat. < Sixth Embodiment > Fig. 21 shows another embodiment of the needle swing mechanism, that is, the sixth embodiment of the present invention, and is the same as Fig. 3, and Fig. 20 is the needle swing. A diagrammatic perspective of the internal mechanism of the institution. In Fig. 21, "the similar components as those in the third circle are given the same name" and their descriptions are omitted. Here, only the components having a structure different from that in FIG. 3 will be described below. That is, according to the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, a baseline motor 40 and a swing width motor 41 'are used in the needle swing mechanism 42 and their axes intersect with the upper shaft 6, respectively. At right angles and extending horizontally, the cylindrical slotted cams 70 and 71 are connected to the output shafts of the baseline motor 40 and the swing width motor 41, respectively. In addition, an engaging yoke 43e is arranged at the lower end portion of the baseline arm 43 and is engaged with a cam groove 70a formed in the outer circumference of the slotted cam 70 of the baseline motor 40, and there is an engaging pivot paper Standards_National Standards (CNS) A4 Regulations-Grid 〇〇297 297 public love) 1 ---- install -------- order --------- r * (Please read first Note on the back. Please fill in this page again.) A7 402649 V. Description of the invention ('55e is arranged at the lower end of the swing width arm 55 and engages with a cam groove formed in the outer circumference of the slotted cam 71 of the swing width motor 41. In this way, in the buttonhole darning sewing machine, since the baseline motor 40 and the swing width motor 41 are constituted by pulse motors respectively, both are disposed in the vertical body portion 3, and the shaft system thereof is parallel to the upper surface of the base 2 Therefore, as in the first embodiment described above, not only the two rooms in the vertical body portion 3 can be effectively used, but also the number of components that must be installed on the outer portion of the sewing machine frame can be reduced, so that the appearance of the sewing machine frame can be reduced. Be neat. ≪ Seventh implementation Example > Fig. 22 turns to another embodiment of the cutting knife transmission mechanism, which is the seventh embodiment of the present invention, and Fig. 22 is a perspective view of the cutting knife transmission mechanism. The cloth cutting knife is moved up and down by a mechanical transmission mechanism, in particular, a mechanism disclosed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 7 14438. A mechanism similar to that shown in FIG. The same name is given and its description is omitted. Here, only the components having a structure different from that in FIG. 13 will be described below. That is, according to the seventh embodiment, there is a block as shown in FIG. 22 A transmission hook with a cutter mounting plate 31 having a cloth cutting knife 16 connected to one end portion of a transmission rod 35 pivotally connected to a shaft 35a through a connecting rod 35b, and a transmission hook 37 is supported by rotation "on the other end of the transmission rod 35. The cutter driving hand # 36 can move up and down, that is, it is connected to the upper shaft 6 * shown in the second top. First, install .---- --- Order --------- Γ fjing4? Read the notes on the back and fill out this page) Standards for Private Paper Printing by Employee Consumer Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Intellectual Property of the Ministry of Finance (CNS) A4 Specification (f x 297 mm) --39 37 A7 37 A7 Printed by Employee Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (-The direction of the arrow A. On the other hand, the cutter drive fishing 37 has a ringing recess 37a in its upper end portion, which is engaged with the cutter drive arm% and it is usually supplied with energy by the spring 37b and follow It rotates clockwise. Further, a start lever 38 and a push rod 39 are arranged below the cutter driving arm 36 and the driving hook η described above. The starting lever can be connected to a starting frame (not shown) arranged in the sewing machine, and can be moved in a direction indicated by an arrow B in FIG. 22. On the other hand, the push rod 30 is located in the above-mentioned base 2 and can be moved up and down because it engages with a cutout 72a formed on a main cam π that can be rotated together with the upper shaft 6. In addition, a starting arm 73 is arranged above the starting lever 38. When starting, the starting arm 73 can be moved in the direction of arrow B by the starting lever 38, and can be moved in the opposite direction when the sewing machine stops, and is arranged on the tool The -pin pivot in the driving fishing 37 is engaged to prevent the cutter driving fishing from rotating. Furthermore, a cam control mechanism 74 is arranged above the push rod 39. The cam control mechanism 74 is connected to the vertical moving push rod 39 to make the driving hook 37 Rotate around an axis which serves as a contact point between the transmission lever 35 and the transmission hook 37. According to the cloth cutter transmission mechanism described above, if the sewing machine is driven, an activation lever connected to an activation frame (not shown) 38 will move in the direction of arrow 8, so the starting arm 73 rotates counterclockwise around the shaft 73a, so that the starting arm 73 is disengaged from the pivot 37c of the cutter driving hook 37. In view of this, a protruding portion 37d of the cutter driving hook 37 and the cam The control mechanism 74 is engaged, and because the cam control mechanism 74 is operated, the cutter driving hook 37 is in a rotatable state. The buttonhole weaving process is performed in this rotating state, Medium, this paper is suitable for National Standards (CNS) A4 (210 X 297). — — — — — — ΊΙΙΙ — 1- ΐ · 11. (Please read the precautions on the back and fill out this page) Order. A7 Five employees of Intellectual Property Bureau, Consumer Consumption, Invention Description (38) The pusher 39 can move in the vertical direction because it engages with the cutout 72a formed on the surface of the main cam connected to the upper shaft 6. ——Because of the operation of the cam control mechanism 74, the cutter driving hook 37 rotates clockwise around the shaft 37e driven by the force of the spring 37b, so that the engaging recess 37a of the cutter driving hook 37 and the cutter driving arm 邗That is, the front end portion of the vertical movement bites. That is, because the transmission lever 35 is forced to swing about the shaft 35a, the cloth cutting knife 16 moves up and down at a specific time, thereby cutting out a specific portion of the fabric and forming a button hole, and ends Buttonhole weaving procedure. ≪ Eighth Embodiment > Fig. 23 shows another embodiment of the cloth cutter driving mechanism, which is the eighth embodiment of the present invention, and Fig. 23 A perspective view of a drive system for driving a cloth cutter. In FIG. 23, components similar to those in FIG. 13 are given the same names, and descriptions thereof are omitted. Here, only the following Describe the components with a different structure from the first call. That is, according to the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, a cutter mounting plate 31 having a cutting knife 16 is arranged on the shaft to the root One end portion of the transmission rod 35 on the shaft 35a, and a transmission hook 37 engaged with a cutter transmission arm 36 is disposed on the other end portion of the transmission rod 35. The cutter transmission arm 36 may be connected to the upper shaft 6 and Moving up and down. On the other hand, the cutter driving hook 37 has an engaging recess 37a 'in its central portion to engage the cutter driving arm 36, and it is usually powered by a spring 37b and rotates clockwise. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 cm)

I 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ^02649 A7 _ B7 39 五、發明說明() 而且’於刀具傳動鉤37上端部分之外侧配置有一根螺 線管75。螺線管75係建構成使其柱塞75a能夠與刀具傳動 鉤37之上端部分接觸,藉使嚙合凹部37a於彈簧37b之旋轉 力量作用下與刀具傳動手臂36分離。 因此,若螺線管75之柱塞75a往後退,則刀具傳動鉤37 繞著藉由彈簧37b之力量驅動而旋轉的轴37e順時針轉動, 而使嚙合凹部37a能夠與刀具傳動手臂36之垂直移動前端 部分咬合。 除了螺線管75之外,亦可使用一氣紅元件。 <第九項實施例> 第24圖為裁布刀安裝結構之通用範例的一個分解透視 圖。一般而言,如第24圖中所示,裁布刀16係利用一根固 定螺桿32、透過一個墊圈32&而安裝在一個安裝凹部76&内 ,該安裝凹部係於以螺釘固定在上述之刀具安裝板31的下 端部分之刀具安裝件内形成。 於第九項實施例中,為了防止尺寸異於專用裁布刀尺 寸之裁布刀被安裝的可能性,則提供了一個判定部分作為 選擇裝置。 也就是說,如第25圖中所示,於刀具安裝件%之安裝 凹部76a内提供了一個判定用之小突出部分鳩,尤其是在 專用的裁布刀16内,於其對應小突出部分鳩處形成有一 個判定用之小孔l6a。 《者’如第26圖中所示,於刀具安裝件76之安裝凹部 76a的轉角部分形成有—個判定用之傾斜部分W, 本紙張尺度剌巾國㈣料(CNS)A4祕(21Q ^公髮_ -I ί' 裝--------訂---------r .(請知閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} 40 402649 Δ7 Α7 -------- 五、發明說明( 在專用裁布刀16内與傾斜部分?6〇對應之轉角部分形成有 一個斜裁部分16b。 <第十項實施例> 第27圖繪示了裁布刀形狀的一個範例,在此實施例中 ,如第27(b)圖中所示,以具有一個切換排氣口 16c之專用 裁布刀16取代標準裁布刀16(第27(a)圖),或者如第27(c) 圖中所示,使用一把於其轉角部分具有一斜裁部分i6d的 專用裁布刀16。 而且,如第27(b)圖中所示,當使用具有一切換排氣 口 16c之專用裁布刀16時,如第28(勾及(1))圖中所示有一 個判定開關77安裝於刀具安裝件76之背面,而判定開關π 的一個壓按切換部分77a接至與安裝凹部76a之切換排氣口 16c對應的一個位置上。 此外,如第27⑷圖中所示’當使用具有斜裁部分⑹ 之專用裁布刀16時,如第29(&)及(1>)圖中所示安裝於刀 具安裝件76之背面上的判定開關77之壓按切換部分"a接 至與專用裁布刀16之斜裁部分相對應的一個位置上。 上述之判定部分及判定開關77亦可作為選擇裝置。 <第十一項實施例> 第30圖纷示了壓布機與裁布刀之間關係的_個範例。 舉例來說,如第30圖中所示,當固定一個其尺寸較裁布刀 16尺寸為小的壓布機時,裁布刀16會與壓布機Η接觸。 有鑑於此,根據第十一項實施例,提 ^ ^ a 代択了一個判定部 分,用以判定壓布機1 5的尺寸。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公髮) r- -----JHI — It I ^--------訂-------象 (請先閲11背面之、注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7___ 五、發明說明(41 ) 如第31圖中所示,用以支撐壓布機15的一個又形安裝 件25係藉由一根階式螺桿78a及支撐彈簧(線圈彈簧)78b, 利用安裝件25能夠朝第31圖之箭頭C所示之方向擺動的一 個方式’支撐於上述進給機構21之布料固定手臂24的前端 部分上面。 而且’於布料固定手臂24之前端部分侧上面,例如第 31圖中所示,於壓布機15之安裝件25上面嵌入多個(於例 示之實施例中為三個)判定感測器79a、79b、79c,其每個 均為光學式的,並以並列方式配置。 因此,舉例來說,如第31圖中所示,若安裝了 一型的 壓布機15,則判定感測器79c可用本壓布機15之安裝件25 覆蓋’以看出裝了小型的壓布機15。 此外,雖然並未示出,然而若裝了一個中型的壓布機 ’則兩個判定感測器791)及79c均由中型壓布機的安裝件覆 蓋’表示裝了中型的壓布機。再者,若裝了 一個大型的屋 布機’則三個判定感測器79a、79b及79c均由大型壓布機 的安裝件覆蓋,表示裝了大型的壓布機。 根據用以判定壓布機15尺寸之判定部分,不僅可使用 光學式的判定感測器79a、791?及79(;,亦可使用按鈕式的 的一個判定開關。此外,所使用之感測器或開關的數目視 需求而定。 現在’根據判定結果,有一個對應於目前壓布機、且 必須於第39圖之第15行中設定的數值從先前儲存的一個表 格(未不出)中讀出,並接著設定於第39圖之第15行中。 本紙張尺度適用中國國i格⑽X 297公釐)-------- ----I I Ί I---I » -----I--訂----I----广 1 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7__ 五、發明說明(42 ) 接著’下文中將敘述控制系統。 上述所建構之鈕孔織補縫紉機係根據第35圖中繪示的 一個控制組塊結構加以控制。 也就是說,如第35圖中所示,有一個R〇M 101、RAM 102 、Y進給計數器103、基線進給計數器1〇4、缝針擺動進給 計數器105、裁布刀計數器106、裁線進給計數器1〇7、中 斷控制器108、以及I/O介面1〇9透過諸匯流排接至CPU100 〇 CPU100包括有各種控制部分及運算裝置:亦即縫紉機 控制裝置、縫紉機傳動速度判定裝置、修正基線及縫針擺 動寬度改變量之裝置、指定縫線形成順序之裝置、縫合資 料讀取裝置、指定縫合開始之裝置、刀具控制裝置、具有 刀具向下移動時間判定裝置之刀具垂直移動時間判定裝置 、判定刀具上下移動時間間隔之裝置、侧邊缝線長度改變 裝置、縫針下降控制裝置、判定圖案放大及縮小參考點之 裝置、各種傳動控制裝置以及類似裝置。 於ROM101内儲存了控制程式與内定值,例如儲存了 其内分別用以存放縫合模式、拉力鉤匹配模式、穿線模式 、以及類似模式之記憶體部分。 於RAM 102内儲存了各種控制變數’例如儲存了缝人 資料、基線/縫針擺動資料以及類似資料。 每個Y進給計數器103、基線進給計數器1〇4、縫針擺 動進給計數器105、裁布刀計數器106以及裁線進給計數器 107均建構成若有一個計數值被寫入,並有一個計數器 _本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公髮) :~~^: ---- :1! i Γ -裝--------訂----I I I I 1^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 4〇2649 五、發明說明(43 ) t 動指令被寫入,則經過與計數值成比例之時間後,計數器 會輪出一個脈衝的計數信號’並於特定的一個時間週期内 重複其計數器輸出,直到有一個計數器停止指令寫入為止 。中斷控制器108係當輸入一中斷信號時,讓cpui〇〇能夠 執行與中斷k號輸入對應之中斷處理的一個控制器。I〆。 介面109係供CPU1 〇〇與外部輸入/輸出裝置交談的一個介 此外,Y進給計數器103、基線進給計數器1〇4、縫針 擺動進給計數器105、裁布刀計數器1〇6以及裁線進給計數 器107之各個計數輸出係連至中斷控制器1〇8,並根據各計 數器之計數輸出執行對應於各計數器之中斷處理。 訂 而且,於第35圖中,有一塊控制面板11〇,如第36圖 中所示,係由一個顯示部分及各種按鍵構成,也就是說, 其係供操作者完成各項設定及縫合所需之控制的一塊面板 有一個Y進給脈衝驅動裝置係建構成當來自γ進給計 數器1〇3的一個Y進給計數器輸出信號與來自I/O介面109 的—個Y進給方向+/_信號輸入其内時,使Y進給脈衝馬達( 亦即上述之進給馬達)20轉動一個與各計數器根據γ進給 方向+/-而輸出的一個脈衝相等之量。 有一個基線進給脈衝馬達驅動裝置112係建構成當來 自基線進給計數器104的一個基線進給計數器輪出信號與 來自I/O介面109的-個基線進給方向仏信號輸入其内時 ,使基線進給脈衝馬達(亦即上述之基線馬達)4〇轉動一個 h 297公釐) A7I Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ 02649 A7 _ B7 39 V. Description of the invention () Furthermore, a solenoid 75 is arranged on the outer side of the upper end of the cutter driving hook 37. The solenoid 75 is constructed so that its plunger 75a can contact the upper end portion of the cutter driving hook 37, and the engaging recess 37a is separated from the cutter driving arm 36 by the rotating force of the spring 37b. Therefore, if the plunger 75a of the solenoid 75 moves backward, the cutter driving hook 37 rotates clockwise around the shaft 37e driven by the force of the spring 37b, so that the engaging recess 37a can be perpendicular to the cutter driving arm 36. Move the front part to engage. In addition to the solenoid 75, a gas red element may be used. < Ninth embodiment > Fig. 24 is an exploded perspective view of a general example of a cloth knife mounting structure. In general, as shown in FIG. 24, the cloth cutter 16 is mounted in a mounting recess 76 & through a fixing screw 32 and a washer 32 & The lower end portion of the cutter mounting plate 31 is formed in a cutter mount. In the ninth embodiment, in order to prevent the possibility that a cloth cutter having a size different from that of a dedicated cloth cutter may be installed, a judging section is provided as a selection device. That is to say, as shown in FIG. 25, a small protruding portion dove is provided in the mounting recess 76a of the tool mounting member%, and particularly in the dedicated cloth cutting knife 16, corresponding to the small protruding portion. A small hole l6a for judgment is formed at the dove. As shown in FIG. 26, a corner portion W for determination is formed on a corner portion of the mounting recess 76a of the cutter mounting member 76. The paper size is a national standard (CNS) A4 secret (21Q ^ Gongfa _ -I ί 'Outfit -------- Order --------- r. (Please read the notes on the back and fill in this page again) 40 402649 Δ7 Α7 ----- --- V. Description of the invention (In the special cloth cutting knife 16, a corner portion corresponding to the inclined portion? 60 is formed with a diagonal cutting portion 16b. ≪ Tenth embodiment > Fig. 27 shows the cutting cloth An example of the shape of a knife. In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 27 (b), a special cloth cutter 16 having a switching exhaust port 16c is used instead of the standard cloth cutter 16 (Fig. 27 (a)). ), Or as shown in Figure 27 (c), use a special cutting knife 16 with a beveled portion i6d at its corner. Also, as shown in Figure 27 (b), when using When the special cloth cutter 16 of the exhaust port 16c is switched, as shown in FIG. 28 (hook and (1)), a judgment switch 77 is installed on the back of the cutter mounting member 76, and a pressing of the judgment switch π Switching part 77a To a position corresponding to the switching exhaust port 16c of the mounting recess 76a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 27 (shown in FIG. 27), when the special cloth cutter 16 having a beveled portion 使用 is used, as shown in (29 &) and (1) The pressing switch portion " a of the determination switch 77 mounted on the back of the cutter mounting member 76 shown in the figure is connected to a position corresponding to the diagonal cutting portion of the special cloth cutter 16. The above The judging section and the judging switch 77 can also be used as a selection device. ≪ Eleventh embodiment > Fig. 30 shows an example of the relationship between the cloth press and the cutter. For example, as shown in Fig. 30 As shown in the figure, when a cloth presser whose size is smaller than that of the cloth cutter 16 is fixed, the cloth cutter 16 will contact the cloth presser Η. In view of this, according to the eleventh embodiment, ^ a substitutes a judging part for judging the size of the cloth press 15. This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297). r- ----- JHI — It I ^ -------- Order ------- Elephant (please read the precautions on the back of 11 before filling out this page) Employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the agency, printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economics, printed A7 B7___ V. Description of the invention (41) As shown in Figure 31, a shape-fitting piece 25 for supporting the cloth press 15 is provided by a The stepped screw 78a and the support spring (coil spring) 78b are supported on the front end portion of the cloth fixing arm 24 of the feeding mechanism 21 by a method in which the mounting member 25 can swing in the direction shown by arrow C in FIG. 31. . Moreover, a plurality of (three in the illustrated embodiment) judgment sensors 79a are embedded on the front side of the cloth fixing arm 24, for example, as shown in FIG. 31, on the mounting member 25 of the cloth press 15 , 79b, 79c, each of which is optical and arranged side by side. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 31, if a type of cloth press 15 is installed, it is determined that the sensor 79c can be covered by the mounting member 25 of the cloth press 15 to see that a small Cloth pressing machine 15. In addition, although not shown, if a medium-sized cloth pressing machine is installed, then the two determination sensors 791) and 79c are covered by the mounting member of the medium-sized cloth pressing machine, indicating that the medium-sized cloth pressing machine is installed. Furthermore, if a large-scale roof cloth presser is installed, the three determination sensors 79a, 79b, and 79c are all covered by the attachments of the large-scale cloth press, indicating that a large-scale cloth press is installed. According to the judging part for judging the size of the cloth presser 15, not only the optical judgment sensors 79a, 791 ?, and 79 (;, but also a judgment switch of the push button type can be used. In addition, the sensing used The number of switches or switches depends on the demand. Now according to the judgment result, there is a value corresponding to the current press and must be set in line 15 of Figure 39 from a previously stored table (not shown) Read out, and then set in the 15th line of Figure 39. This paper size applies to China's national standard ⑽ X 297 mm) -------- ---- II Ί I --- I » ----- I--Order ---- I ---- Guang 1 (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7__ 5. Description of the invention ( 42) Next, 'the control system will be described below. The buttonhole darning sewing machine constructed as described above is controlled according to a control block structure shown in FIG. 35. That is, as shown in Fig. 35, there is one ROM 101, RAM 102, Y feed counter 103, baseline feed counter 104, needle swing feed counter 105, cutting knife counter 106, The thread cutting feed counter 107, the interrupt controller 108, and the I / O interface 1109 are connected to the CPU 100 through the busses. The CPU 100 includes various control sections and computing devices: namely, a sewing machine control device and a sewing machine transmission speed determination. Device, device for correcting the change of baseline and needle swing width, device for specifying suture formation sequence, device for reading stitching data, device for specifying stitching start, tool control device, tool vertical movement time with tool downward movement time determination device Judgment device, device for judging the time interval of the cutter moving up and down, side stitch length changing device, needle drop control device, device for judging pattern enlargement and reduction of reference point, various transmission control devices and similar devices. A control program and a preset value are stored in the ROM 101, for example, a memory portion for storing a suture mode, a pull hook matching mode, a threading mode, and the like, respectively. Various control variables' are stored in the RAM 102, such as the sewing person data, baseline / needle swing data, and the like. Each Y feed counter 103, baseline feed counter 104, needle swing feed counter 105, cutting knife counter 106, and thread feed counter 107 are constructed. If a count value is written, there is a Counter _ This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 public hair): ~~ ^: ----: 1! I Γ-装 -------- Order ---- IIII 1 ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 4〇2649 V. Description of the invention (43) t The motion instruction is written, and after a time proportional to the count value, the counter will rotate a pulse Count signal 'and repeat its counter output within a specific time period until a counter stops writing instructions. The interrupt controller 108 is a controller that allows cpui〇〇 to perform interrupt processing corresponding to the interrupt k input when an interrupt signal is input. I〆. The interface 109 is an interface for the CPU 100 to talk to an external input / output device. In addition, the Y feed counter 103, the baseline feed counter 104, the needle swing feed counter 105, the cutting knife counter 106, and the cutting thread Each count output of the feed counter 107 is connected to the interrupt controller 108 and executes interrupt processing corresponding to each counter according to the count output of each counter. Moreover, in FIG. 35, there is a control panel 11, as shown in FIG. 36, which is composed of a display section and various keys, that is, it is used for the operator to complete various settings and stitching. A panel to be controlled has a Y-feed pulse driving device, which is composed of a Y-feed counter output signal from the γ-feed counter 10 and a Y-feed direction from the I / O interface 109 + / When the _ signal is inputted therein, the Y feed pulse motor (ie, the above-mentioned feed motor) 20 is rotated by an amount equal to one pulse output by each counter according to the γ feed direction +/-. A baseline feed pulse motor driving device 112 is configured to input a baseline feed counter wheel out signal from the baseline feed counter 104 and a baseline feed direction signal from the I / O interface 109, Rotate the baseline feed pulse motor (that is, the above-mentioned baseline motor) by 40 h (297 mm) A7

45 A7 B7 入 五、發明說明( 器116之上方位置偵測輸出係作為—個縫針數目計數輸 而且,縫幼機馬達驅動裝置115將縫初機之停止或旋 轉狀態輸出至!/0介面109,作為一個縫㈣停止或旋轉狀 態信號,且其亦將一信號從縫針上方位置感測器ιΐ6輸出 至中斷控制器1〇8,作為一個縫針上方位置中斷信號。 再者,縫紉機馬達驅動襄置115從一個進給參考位置 感測器117及TG產生器(速度產生器)118輸出信冑至中斷控 制器108,分別作為進給參考中斷及T(J中斷。進給參考位 置感測器117係用以控制γ進給馬達、基線進給馬達、縫 針擺動進給馬達等之進給。TG產生器118係用以產生縫紉 機馬達每二十分之一方波即旋轉一圈的一個產生器。 有一個來自縫匆機馬達編碼器119之信號被回授至縫 紉機馬達驅動裝置11 5中。 現在’通常有一個主動張力驅動裝置12〇根據從RAM 102經由I/O介面109而輸入其内之資料,控制上方縫線張 力VCM(Voice Coil Motor,亦即上述之音頻線圈馬達)6〇 ,藉以產生一個張力,而且當縫紉機停止/旋轉狀態信號 、進給參考信號以及TG信號從縫紉機馬達驅動裝置H5輸 入其内時,亦即在縫紉機轉動期間的特定時間中,其將控 制上方縫線張力VCM60而改變其張力。 有一條加壓器上升螺線管驅動電路121根據來自I/O介 面109的一個加壓器上/下信號而驅動一根加壓器上升螺線 管 122 » 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) nil-------裝-------訂---------線 <請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 402649 五、發明說明(46 ) 有一條裁布刀下行氣缸驅動電路123根據來自I/O介面 109的一個裁布刀上/下信號而驅動一個裁布刀下行氣缸( 亦即上述之裁布刀氣缸元件)3〇。 第35圖中繪示的一個γ進給原點感測器係用以偵測γ 進給脈衝馬達20之原點位置,此感測器亦即上述之進給原 點偵測感測器26。 第35圖中所示的一個基線進給原點感測器係用以偵測 基線進給脈衝馬達4〇之原點位置,此感測器亦即上述之基 線原點偵測感測器5 7。 第3 5囷中所示的一個縫針擺動進給原點感測器係用以 偵測縫針擺動進給脈衝馬達41之原點位置,此感測器亦即 上述之擺動寬度原點偵測感測器5 8。 加壓器開關124係供操作者於固定一工件時用以上升 及下降上述之壓布機15的一個操作開關,因此加壓器開關 124係連同一項操作命令壓下縫紉機之踏板。 啟動開關125係供操作者於固定一工件時用以啟動縫 合程序的一個操作開關,因此亦與上述之縫紉機踏板下壓 控制一起使用。 裁線進給原點感測器126係用以偵測上述之上方縫線 剪刀的移動原點位置,也就是說,於第32圖中已分別討論 過之上方縫線剪刀及驅動該剪刀的傳動機構中舉例來說 ,提供了 一個閉路式的裁線進給原點感測器126,用以偵 測隨脈衝馬達80之輸出轴80a擺動、並以其作為支點的手 臂81之原始位置,而且在手臂81内配置了一塊由本裁線進 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公髮)45 A7 B7 Enter 5. Description of the invention (The position detection output above the device 116 is used to count the number of stitches. Moreover, the sewing machine motor drive device 115 outputs the stop or rotation status of the initial sewing machine to the! / 0 interface 109 As a signal for the stop or rotation status of the sewing machine, it also outputs a signal from the position sensor above the needle to the interrupt controller 10, as an interrupt signal for the position above the sewing machine. Furthermore, the motor of the sewing machine is driven 115 outputs a signal from a feed reference position sensor 117 and a TG generator (speed generator) 118 to the interrupt controller 108 as a feed reference interrupt and a T (J interrupt. Feed reference position sensor 117 It is used to control the feed of the γ feed motor, the baseline feed motor, the needle swing feed motor, etc. The TG generator 118 is a generator used to generate a one-twentieth square wave of the sewing machine motor, which is one rotation. A signal from the sewing machine motor encoder 119 is fed back to the sewing machine motor drive 115. Now there is usually an active tension drive 120 based on the RAM 102 via the I / O interface 109 and input the data in it to control the upper stitch tension VCM (Voice Coil Motor, also referred to as the above-mentioned audio coil motor) 6 to generate a tension, and when the sewing machine stop / rotation status signal, feed reference signal and TG When the signal is input from the sewing machine motor driving device H5, that is, at a specific time during the sewing machine rotation, it will control the upper stitch tension VCM60 to change its tension. There is a pressure booster solenoid driving circuit 121 according to the A pressure booster up / down signal from I / O interface 109 drives a pressure booster solenoid 122 »This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) nil --- ---- Install ------- Order --------- line < Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) The Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy Employees Cooperatives Print the wisdom of the Ministry of Economy Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Property Bureau 402649 V. Description of the Invention (46) There is a cloth cutter down cylinder driving circuit 123 that drives a cloth cutter down cylinder according to a cloth knife up / down signal from the I / O interface 109 ( Which is the above Cloth knife cylinder element) 30. A gamma feed origin sensor shown in Fig. 35 is used to detect the origin position of the gamma feed pulse motor 20, and this sensor is also the above-mentioned feed. Origin detection sensor 26. A baseline feed origin sensor shown in Figure 35 is used to detect the origin position of the baseline feed pulse motor 40. This sensor is also the above Baseline origin detection sensor 5 7. A needle swing feed origin sensor shown in the 3rd to 5th steps is used to detect the origin position of the needle swing feed pulse motor 41. This sensor That is, the above-mentioned swing width origin detection sensor 58. The presser switch 124 is an operation switch for the operator to raise and lower the above-mentioned cloth press 15 when fixing a workpiece, so the presser switch 124 presses down the pedal of the sewing machine together with an operation command. The start switch 125 is an operation switch for the operator to start the sewing program when fixing a workpiece, and is therefore also used with the above-mentioned sewing machine pedal depression control. The cutting thread feed origin sensor 126 is used to detect the above-mentioned moving origin position of the upper suture scissors, that is, the upper suture scissors and the driving of the scissors have been discussed in FIG. 32 respectively. For example, in the transmission mechanism, a closed-circuit wire feed origin sensor 126 is provided to detect the original position of the arm 81 swinging with the output shaft 80a of the pulse motor 80 and using it as a fulcrum. And in the arm 81, a piece of paper cut from the cutting line into this paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297)

. .,· --------^i.------- •(請先閲讀背面之·注意事項再填寫本頁) A7 A7. ,, -------- ^ i .------- • (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) A7 A7

47 五、發明說明() 給原點感測器126構成的裁線進給原點偵測磁鐵丨26a。 此外,第35圖中繪示的一個縫針擺動左右偵測開關亦 即上述之縫針擺動左右位置偵測感測器59。 有一個裁布刀驅動請求開關127用以降低並驅動上述 之裁布刀16。第35圖中繪示的一個刀具尺寸辨識裝置係用 以確認是否安裝了適當尺寸的裁布刀16,尤其是,本刀具 尺寸辨識裝置亦即上述之判定開關77。 第35圖中繪示的一個加壓器尺寸辨識裝置係用以確認 是否安裝了適當尺寸的上述壓布機15,尤其是,本加壓器 尺寸辨識裝置亦即上述之判定感測器79(79&、79b、79c) ο 第35圖中的一個刀具上/下偵測開關係由上述之裁布 刀上/下位置感測器34a及34b構成。 而且,第36圖中繪示之控制面板11〇包括有各種按鍵 及顯示部分。 也就是說,控制面板110包括有:一個縫合鍵ΐ3ι以及 一個LED顯示部分132,其中當縫合鍵131被按下時,顯示 部分會顯示出缝初機被設定在一個縫合模式;並有一個選 擇鍵133以及LED顯示部分134、135、136、137及138,每 次選擇鍵133被按下時,諸顯示部分會連續顯示出圖案編 號、參數編號、速度設定模式、縫線插入模式、拉力鉤匹 配模式。 控制面板110還包括有:-個由具有nED數據段 之圖案顯示部分構成的數值顯示部分140及一個具位 本紙張尺度適用令國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ 297公釐) . . 裝--------訂--------線 ♦ - {請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 ^02649 五、發明說明l 數LED數據段的參數顯示部分142 ;分別用以減少或増加 數值顯示部分140之數值土的一個負號鍵143與一個正號鍵 144;分別用以減少或增加數值顯示部分ι4〇之數值每個特 定單位的一個下鍵與145—個上鍵146;以及作為縫線插入 鍵或拉力鉤匹配鍵的一個設定鍵147。再者,雖然並未示 出’然而在控制面板110中提供了一個開關,用以選擇上 述之左旋或右旋鈕孔織補缝合程序。 順便提一下’具有上述各種按鍵之控制面板11〇更是 具有分別作為紐孔/刀具葉片長度設定裝置、紐孔成形寬 度方向位置設定裝置、設定固定縫線縫合部分與鈕孔末端 部分之間間隔的裝置、圖案放大/縮小設定裝置、固定縫 線數目/節距設定裝置等的功用。 接著,下文中將參看第37圖敘述一項具體實施例,圖 中繪示了必須根據第3 5圖中繪示之控制組塊完成控制的一 個通用流程圖。 下文中所討論之控制可透過於一顆Cpu 1〇〇、r〇M1〇1 、以及RAM 102之間的信號傳送及接收而完成:尤其是, CPU 100包括有各種控制部分(縫紉機控制裝置、縫紉機速 度判定裝置、基線及縫針擺動寬度改變量修正裝置、縫線 成形順序指定裝置、縫合資料讀取裝置、用以設定縫合起 始位置之起始指定装置、刀具控制裝置、具有刀具下降時 間判定裝置之垂值移動時間判定裝置、用以判定刀具上下 移動時間之間間隔的判定裝置、侧邊縫合長度改變裝置、 縫針下降控制裝置、圖案放大/縮小參考點判定裝置、各 公釐) ------i - Μ.--------訂---------广 (請先閱讀背面之汰意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製47 V. Description of the invention () The cutting line feed origin detection magnet 26a formed by the origin sensor 126 is provided. In addition, a stitch swing left / right detection switch shown in FIG. 35 is the above-mentioned stitch swing left / right position detection sensor 59. A cloth knife driving request switch 127 is used to lower and drive the cloth knife 16 described above. A tool size identification device shown in Fig. 35 is used to confirm whether or not a cloth cutter 16 of an appropriate size is installed. In particular, the tool size identification device is the above-mentioned determination switch 77. A presser size identification device shown in FIG. 35 is used to confirm whether the above-mentioned cloth press 15 of an appropriate size is installed. In particular, the presser size identification device is the above-mentioned determination sensor 79 ( 79 &, 79b, 79c) ο A cutter up / down detection opening relationship in FIG. 35 is composed of the above-mentioned cloth cutter up / down position sensors 34a and 34b. Moreover, the control panel 11 shown in FIG. 36 includes various keys and a display portion. That is, the control panel 110 includes: a sewing key ΐ3ι and an LED display section 132, wherein when the sewing key 131 is pressed, the display section shows that the initial sewing machine is set to a sewing mode; and there is a choice Key 133 and LED display sections 134, 135, 136, 137, and 138. Each time selection key 133 is pressed, the display section will continuously display the pattern number, parameter number, speed setting mode, suture insertion mode, pull hook. Matching pattern. The control panel 110 also includes: a numerical display section 140 composed of a pattern display section with nED data segments, and a paper size applicable to the national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm). Packing -------- Order -------- Line ♦-{Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by A7 ^ 02649, Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Explanation l The parameter display section 142 of the LED data segment; a minus key 143 and a plus key 144 respectively used to reduce or increase the value of the numerical display section 140; used to reduce or increase the numerical display section ι4〇 A lower key and 145-up key 146 for each specific unit of the value; and a setting key 147 as a suture insertion key or a pull hook matching key. Furthermore, although not shown ', a switch is provided in the control panel 110 for selecting the left-handed or right-handed hole darn stitching procedure. Incidentally, the control panel 11 having the above-mentioned various keys has a button hole / cutter blade length setting device, a button hole forming width direction position setting device, and a distance between a fixed suture stitching portion and a button hole end portion. Functions of the device, pattern enlargement / reduction setting device, fixed number of stitches / pitch setting device, etc. Next, a specific embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 37, which shows a general flowchart that must be completed according to the control block shown in FIG. 35. The control discussed below can be accomplished through the transmission and reception of signals between a CPU 100, ROM100, and RAM 102. In particular, the CPU 100 includes various control sections (sewing machine control device, Sewing machine speed determination device, baseline and needle swing width change amount correction device, stitch formation sequence designation device, sewing data reading device, start designation device for setting the sewing start position, tool control device, and tool fall time determination (Vertical movement time judging device of the device, judging device for judging the interval between the vertical movement time of the tool, side stitch length changing device, stitch lowering control device, pattern enlargement / reduction reference point judging device, each millimeter) ---- i-Μ .-------- Order --------- Guang (please read the notice on the back before filling out this page) system

五、發明說明(49 ) (請先閱沐背面之·注意事項再填寫本頁) 種驅動控制裝置以及類似裝置及運算裝置;R〇Ml〇i内儲 存了控制程式與内定值’例如分別用以儲存縫合模式與拉 力鉤匹配模式、以及縫線插入模式等之記憶體部分;而於 RAN102内儲存了各種控制變數,例如缝合資料基線/縫 針擺動資料以及類似資料。此外,CPU1 〇〇根據來自控制 面板110之輸入信號執行特定的控制程序,該控制面板之 功用分別作為鈕孔/刀具葉片長度設定裝置鈕孔成形寬 度方向位置設定裝置、用以設定密線缝合部分與鈕孔末端 部分之間間隔的裝置、圖案放大/縮小設定裝置、固定縫 線數目/節距設定裝置等。 如第37圖之通用流程圖所示,若電源供應器開啟,則 於步驟S1中,首先呼叫一個控制面板設定程序,且各種 設定程序係藉由控制面板110完成。利用控制面板11〇持續 進行各種设定程序,直到縫合鍵131於下一個步驟S2中開 啟為止’而當縫合鍵131被開啟之後,於下一個步驟幻中 呼叫一個縫合資料建立程序建立縫合資料。順便提一下, 於上述之步驟S2中,若縫合鍵131未開啟,則回到上述之 步驟S3。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ‘縫合 > 料建立之後,於下一個步驟S4中,執行一項 輸出指令降低壓布機15,而接著在步驟S5中呼叫一個機 器原點復位程序,藉以回復γ進給脈衝馬達2〇、基線進給 脈衝馬達40、以及縫針擺動進給脈衝馬達41之機器原點。 之後,於步驟S6中呼叫一個縫合起始移動程序,其中丫進 給脈衝馬達20、基線進給脈衝馬達4〇、以及縫針擺動 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公髮) 五、發明說明(50 ) 脈衝馬達4!被㈣至縫合起始位置上。接著,於步㈣ 中執行一項輪出指令,用以升高壓布機15,接著箭進到下 一個步驟S8。 —於步驟S8中,縫合鍵131之狀態被檢測,也就是說’ 若縫合鍵131開啟的話,則回到上述之步驟si再度進行栌 制面板設定程序;否則若縫合鍵131未開啟的話,則進^ 至下一個步驟S9。於步驟S9中,檢測加壓器開關124之狀 態:亦即若加壓器開關124開啟的話,則前進至下—個步驟 S1〇,否則若加壓器開關124未開啟的話,則回到上 步驟S8。 於步驟sio中,檢查壓布機15是否上升:亦即若發現其 上升的話,則執行一項輸出指令,而在下一個步驟sn中 降,壓布機!5;否則若發現並未上升的話,則執行一項輪 出指令,而在下一個步驟S12中升高壓布機15,接著回到 上述之步驟S8。 當執行完壓布機下降輸出指令之後,於下—個步驟M3 中檢查加壓器開關124之狀態:亦即若加壓器開關i24開啟 的話,則於上述之步驟S12中執行一項輸出指令升高壓布 機μ,之後回到上述步驟S8;否則若加壓器開關124並未 開啟的話,則前進至下一個步驟S14。於步驟si4中檢查 啟動開關125,亦即若發現啟動開關125,,開啟,,的話,則進 行至下一個步驟S15’否則若發現啟動開關,,未開啟,,的話 ’則回到上述步驟S13。 而且,於步驟S15中呼叫一個縫合程序,以啟動縫人 402649 A7 B7 51 五、發明說明( 程序。當縫合程序完成之後,於下一個步驟sl6中執行一 項輸出指令升高壓布機15,之後回到上述之步驟S8。 接著’下文中將詳述上述之控制面板設定程序(步驟S1) 、縫合資料建立程序(步驟S3)、機器原點復位程序(步驟S5) 、以及縫合程序(步驟S15),其等分別根據第37圖中繪示 之通用流程圖完成。 尤其是,第38圖繪示了控制面板設定程序(步驟S1)的 一個子程序,其中於步驟S101中,首先檢查選擇鍵133亦 即若其開啟的話,則在下一個步驟S102中將選擇號碼增 加1,之後前進至下一個步驟8103,否則若其並未開啟= 話,則前進至步驟S105。 於步驟SH)3中檢查選擇號碼:亦即若選擇號瑪超過最 大號碼[4]的話,則在下一個步驟81〇4中,於選擇號碼中 β又為[0]而使選擇號碼恢復至〇,之後前逸圣丁 ⑴%主下一個步驟 S105;否則若選擇號碼為最大號碼[4] r的話,則前進 至步驟S105。 於步驟S105中檢查選擇號碼是否為〇:亦 I若其為0的 話,則前進至步驟S106執行一項圖案變更 尺程序,之後前 進至上述通用流程圖(第37圖)之步驟S2;本則 进則若其不為〇 的話,則前進至步驟S107。 ’ 於步驟S107中檢查選擇號碼是否為1:亦即若 話,則前進至步驟S108執行一項參數變更輕序、為1的 進至上述通用流程圖(第37圖)之步驟S2;本之後前 进則若其不I 1 的話,則前進至步驟S109。 ’ ^紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) - 111----訂·—I—I —r- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製V. Description of the invention (49) (please read the precautions on the back of the Mu first and then fill out this page) a variety of drive control devices and similar devices and computing devices; control programs and default values are stored in Romioi, for example, used separately It stores the memory parts such as the stitching mode and tension hook matching mode, and the suture insertion mode; and various control variables are stored in the RAN 102, such as the stitching data baseline / stitch swing data and similar data. In addition, the CPU 100 executes a specific control program according to an input signal from the control panel 110. The function of the control panel is a button hole / cutter blade length setting device, a button hole forming width direction position setting device, and a dense thread sewing portion. The device is spaced from the end of the buttonhole, the pattern enlargement / reduction setting device, the number of fixed stitches / pitch setting device, etc. As shown in the general flowchart of FIG. 37, if the power supply is turned on, in step S1, a control panel setting procedure is first called, and various setting procedures are completed through the control panel 110. Use the control panel 110 to continue the various setting procedures until the stitching key 131 is turned on in the next step S2 '. After the stitching key 131 is turned on, in the next step, a stitching data creation program is called to create stitching data. Incidentally, in step S2 described above, if the sewing key 131 is not turned on, the process returns to step S3 described above. After the consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs prints the “stitching” material, in the next step S4, execute an output instruction to lower the cloth press 15 and then call a machine origin reset procedure in step S5. Thereby, the machine origins of the γ feed pulse motor 20, the baseline feed pulse motor 40, and the needle swing feed pulse motor 41 are restored. Then, in step S6, a suturing start movement program is called, in which the feed pulse motor 20, the baseline feed pulse motor 40, and the needle swing are applied. The paper size is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). (F) V. Description of the invention (50) The pulse motor 4! Is pinched to the starting position of suture. Next, a step-out instruction is executed in step 用以 to raise the cloth press 15 and the arrow advances to the next step S8. — In step S8, the state of the suture key 131 is detected, that is, 'if the suture key 131 is turned on, return to the above-mentioned step si and perform the control panel setting procedure again; otherwise, if the suture key 131 is not turned on, then Go to ^ to the next step S9. In step S9, the state of the booster switch 124 is detected: that is, if the booster switch 124 is turned on, it proceeds to the next step S10; otherwise, if the booster switch 124 is not turned on, it returns to the top Step S8. In step sio, it is checked whether the cloth pressing machine 15 is raised: that is, if it is found to be rising, an output instruction is executed, and in the next step sn, the cloth pressing machine is lowered! 5; Otherwise, if it is not found to rise, a rotation instruction is executed, and the cloth press 15 is raised in the next step S12, and then returns to the above step S8. After the cloth presser lowering output instruction is executed, the state of the presser switch 124 is checked in the next step M3: that is, if the presser switch i24 is turned on, an output command is executed in the above step S12 Raise the cloth presser μ, and then return to the above step S8; otherwise, if the presser switch 124 is not turned on, proceed to the next step S14. In step si4, check the start switch 125, that is, if the start switch 125 is found to be on, then proceed to the next step S15 '; otherwise, if the start switch is found and not turned on, then return to the above step S13 . Moreover, a stitching program is called in step S15 to start the sewing person 402649 A7 B7 51 V. Description of the invention (procedure. After the stitching procedure is completed, an output instruction is executed in the next step sl6 to raise the cloth press 15 and after that, Return to the above step S8. Then, 'the above-mentioned control panel setting procedure (step S1), suture data creation procedure (step S3), machine origin return procedure (step S5), and suture procedure (step S15 will be described in detail below) ), Which are completed according to the general flowchart shown in Fig. 37. In particular, Fig. 38 shows a subroutine of the control panel setting program (step S1). In step S101, the selection key is first checked. 133, that is, if it is turned on, the selection number is increased by 1 in the next step S102, and then proceeds to the next step 8103, otherwise, if it is not turned on =, then it proceeds to step S105. Check in step SH) 3 Selection number: That is, if the selection number exceeds the maximum number [4], in the next step 8104, β is [0] in the selection number and the selection number is restored to 0. Back to front Saint Ding 主% master next step S105; otherwise, if the selected number is the largest number [4] r, proceed to step S105. In step S105, it is checked whether the selection number is 0: if I is 0, then proceed to step S106 to execute a pattern change rule program, and then proceed to step S2 of the general flow chart (FIG. 37); If it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S107. 'In step S107, it is checked whether the selection number is 1: that is, if it is, then proceed to step S108 to perform a parameter change light order, and proceed to step S2 of the above-mentioned general flowchart (FIG. 37); If it does not advance to I1, it will progress to step S109. '^ The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)-111 ---- Order · —I—I —r- Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumer cooperative A7 B7 Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumer cooperative

i、發明說明 402649 於步驟S109中檢查選擇號碼是否為2:亦即若其為2的 話,則前進至步驟S110執行一項速度變更程序,之後前 進至上述通用流程圊(第37圖)之步驟S2;否則若其不為2 的話,則前進至步驟S111。 於步驟S111中檢查選擇號碼是否為3:亦即若其為3的 話’則前進至步驟S112設定一項縫線插入模式,之後前 進至上述通用流程圖(第37圖)之步驟S2;否則若其不為3 的話,則前進至步驟S113。 於步驟S113中檢查選擇號碼是否為4:亦即若其為4的 話’則前進至步驟S114設定一項拉力鉤匹配模式,之後 前進至上述通用流程圖(第37圖)之步驟S2;否則若其不為 4的話,則直接前進至上述之步驟S2。 接著’下文中將依序詳述圖案變更程序(步驟sl〇6)、 參數變更程序(步驟S108)、速度變更程序(步驟S110)、縫 線插入模式(步驟S112)以及拉力鉤匹配模式(步驟§114), 其等分別包括在上述之控制面板設定程序(步驟S1)中。 於此’在敘述各項程序之前,先敘述第39圖之設定項 目表及第40圖中所示之諸項條件。 於第39圖緣示之設定項目表中,不僅包括了先前已設 定參數之圖案編號1至6,而且亦包括了分別對應於必須視 需求而變動性地設定之參數編號1至19的設定項目,並儲 存於上述之RAM 102中:亦即布料裁剪長度刀具寬度固 疋縫線長度、密線寬度、平行部分節距、密線部分節距、 裁布刀與第一密線之間的間隙長度、裁布刀與第二密線之 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公餐) (請t閱讀背面之泛意事項再填寫本頁) 裝--------訂---r------广 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 _________ B7 53 - m 五、發明說明() 間的間隙長度、刀具下降左右位置、平行部分張力、密線 部分張力、縫合起始張力、縫合末端張力、裁布刀尺寸、 加壓器尺寸、放大/縮小比例、放大及縮小中的固定縫線 數目、刀具下降時間修正縫針數目、於刀具驅動啟動時間 之縫幼機速度。於各圖案編號中,儲存了已經儲存在上述 之ROM101内的内定值。 而且,為了對應各參數編號及設定項目,提供了其等 之設定範圍及單位。 此外,如同在第40圖繪示之條件中,當織補一個鈕孔 時,缝合程序於設定布料長度a、刀具寬度1)、密線長度c 、密線寬度d、平行部分節距e、密線部分節距f、裁布刀 與第一密線部分之間的間隙長度g、以及裁布刀與第二密 線部分之間的間隙長度之後開始進行。 於上述之RAM102中設定了諸項參數,其中紀錄及設 定了圖案編號,而且諸參數可與記錄並設定之參數編號對 應使用,否則這些參數只能在視情況而改變之後使用。 現在’第41圖繪示了圖案變更程序(步驟sl〇6)的一個 子程序。亦即在步驟S106中檢查正號鍵144,若正號鍵144 開啟的話,則在下—個步驟S丨062中將圖案編號增加1, 之後前進至下一個步驟S1063 ;否則若正號鍵144未開啟 的話,則直接前進至步驟S1065。 於步驟S1063中檢查圖案編號,若圖案編號超過最大 號碼[6],則在下—個步驟sl〇64中將圖案編號設為[丨], 之後進行至下一個步驟S1065;否則若圖案編號為最大號 ----Γ— '裝--------訂---------^ Ϊ (請知閲讀背面之生意事項再填寫本頁)i. Description of the invention 402649 In step S109, it is checked whether the selection number is 2: that is, if it is 2, then proceed to step S110 to execute a speed change procedure, and then proceed to the above-mentioned general process 圊 (Figure 37). S2; otherwise, if it is not 2, proceed to step S111. In step S111, it is checked whether the selection number is 3: that is, if it is 3, then proceed to step S112 to set a suture insertion mode, and then proceed to step S2 of the above general flowchart (FIG. 37); otherwise, if If it is not 3, the process proceeds to step S113. In step S113, it is checked whether the selection number is 4: that is, if it is 4 ', then proceed to step S114 to set a pull hook matching mode, and then proceed to step S2 of the general flowchart (Figure 37); otherwise, if If it is not 4, the process proceeds directly to step S2 described above. Next, 'the pattern changing procedure (step sl06), the parameter changing procedure (step S108), the speed changing procedure (step S110), the stitch insertion mode (step S112), and the pull hook matching mode (step S106) §114), which are respectively included in the above-mentioned control panel setting procedure (step S1). Here, before describing the procedures, the setting item list in FIG. 39 and the conditions shown in FIG. 40 are described. The setting item table shown in the margin of FIG. 39 includes not only the pattern numbers 1 to 6 of the previously set parameters, but also the setting items corresponding to the parameter numbers 1 to 19 that must be variably set as required. And stored in the above-mentioned RAM 102: cloth cutting length, cutter width, solid stitch length, dense line width, parallel part pitch, dense line part pitch, gap between the cutting knife and the first dense line The paper size of the length, cloth cutter and the second dense line is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 meals) (please read the general notice on the back and fill in this page). Loading ----- --- Order --- r ------ Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 _________ B7 53-m 5. Description of the invention () The length of the gap between the left and right positions of the cutter, the tension of the parallel part , Tension of the dense thread, Tension of the stitching start, Tension of the stitching end, Cloth knife size, Presser size, Zoom in / out ratio, Number of fixed stitches in zooming in and out, Tool down time Correction of the number of stitches, Tool driving The crack of the start time Speed. In each pattern number, a preset value which has been stored in the above-mentioned ROM 101 is stored. In addition, in order to correspond to each parameter number and setting item, the setting range and unit are provided. In addition, as in the condition shown in Figure 40, when a buttonhole is darned, the stitching program sets the cloth length a, cutter width 1), dense line length c, dense line width d, parallel portion pitch e, and dense. The line portion pitch f, the gap length g between the cloth cutter and the first dense line portion, and the gap length between the cloth cutter and the second dense line portion are performed thereafter. Various parameters are set in the above-mentioned RAM 102, among which the pattern number is recorded and set, and the parameters can be used correspondingly to the parameter number recorded and set, otherwise these parameters can only be used after being changed as the case may be. Now, Fig. 41 shows a subroutine of the pattern changing program (step s106). That is, the positive key 144 is checked in step S106. If the positive key 144 is turned on, the pattern number is increased by 1 in the next step S 丨 062, and then proceeds to the next step S1063; otherwise, if the positive key 144 is not If it is turned on, it proceeds directly to step S1065. Check the pattern number in step S1063. If the pattern number exceeds the maximum number [6], set the pattern number to [丨] in the next step sl064, and then proceed to the next step S1065; otherwise, if the pattern number is the largest No. Γ— 'Installation -------- Order --------- ^ Ϊ (Please read the business matters on the back and fill in this page)

402649 A7 B7 五、發明說明( 54 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 碼[6]以下,則直接進行至步驟S1065。 於步驟S1065中檢查負號鍵143 ’若負號鍵143開啟的 話’則在下一個步驟S1066中將圖案編號減少1 ,之後前 進至下一個步驟S1067;否則若負號鍵ίο未開啟的話, 則直接前進至上述通用流程圖(第37圖)中的步驟S2。 於步驟S1 067中檢查圖案編號’若圏案編號小於最小 號碼[1]的話’則在下一個步驟S1068中將圓案編號設為最 大號碼[6] ’之後前進至上述通用流程圖(第37圖)中的步驟 S2 ° 現在第42圊繪示了參數變更程序(步驟si〇 8)的一個子 程序’於步驟S1081中,首先檢查正號鍵。若正號鍵ι44 開啟的話,則在下一個步驟S 1082中,將圖案編號增加1 ’之後前進至下一個步驟S1083 ;否則若正號鍵144未開 啟的話,則直接前進至步驟S1085。 於步驟S1083中檢查圖案編號,若圖案編號超過最大 號碼[19]的話’則在下一個步驟si〇84中,將圖案編號設 為Π] ’接著進行至下一個步驟S1085;否則若圖案編號為 [19]以下的話’則直接進行至步驟sl〇85。 於步驟S1085中檢查負號鍵143,若負號鍵143開啟的 話’則在下一個步驟S1 〇86中將圖案編號減少1,而之後 前進至下一個步驟S1087;否則若負號鍵143未開啟的話 ,則直接前進至步驟S1089。 於步驟S1087中檢查圖案編號,若圖案編號小於最小 號碼[1]的話’則在下一個步驟81088中將圖案編號設為最 請 閲 讀 背 面 之 注 意 事 項/ 再{靈裝 頁 訂 t 本紙張又度適用中國國豕標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 37 A7 402649 ------B7______ 五、發明說明(55 ) 大號碼[19],接著前進至下一個步驟si 089 ;否則若圖案 編號未小於最小號碼[1 ]的話,則直接前進至步驟S1 〇89。 而且,於步驟S1089中,有一個對應於參數編號之期 望資料變更程序藉由操作下鍵145或上鍵146來執行,之後 前進至上述之步驟S2。 現在,第43圖繪示了速度變更程序(步驟S110)的一個 子程序’於該子程序中完成缝紉機速度變更程序。 於缝紉機速度中,使用了從[400]到[4000]的一個設定 範圍’且其變化單位為[1〇0],作為每分鐘的縫線數目[spm] ,亦即缝線/分鐘。 於本速度變更程序中,如第43圖中所示,在步驟S1101 中首先檢查上鍵146,若上鍵146開啟的話,則在下一個步 驟S1102中將速度資料增加1,之後前進至下一個步驟 S1103;否則若上鍵146未開啟的話,則直接前進至步驟 S1105 。 於步驟S1103中檢查速度資料,若速度資料超過最大 值[4000]的話,則在下一個步驟s 1104中將速度資料設為 [400] ’之後前進至下一個步驟sil 〇5;否則若速度資料小 於最大值[4000]的話,則直接前進至步驟s 11 〇5。 於步驟S1105中檢查下鍵145,若下鍵開啟的話,則在 下一個步驟S1106中將速度資料增加1〇〇,之後前進至下 一個步驟S1107;否則若下鍵未開啟的話,則前進至上述 通用流程圖(第37圖)中的步驟S2。 於步驟S1107中檢查速度資料,若速度資料小於最小 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公髮) I —— I -1 — I I III ^ — — — — — — — ---— II--♦ (請先閱免背面之'注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -58 - 4〇2649 A7 —~~---2Z____ 五、發明說明(56 ) 值[400]的話,則在下—個步驟su〇8中將速度資料設為最 大值[4000],之後進行至上述通用流程圖(第”圖)中的步 驟S2 ;否則若速度資料未小於最小值[4〇〇]的話,則直接 前進至上述步驟S2。 現在,第44圖繪示了縫線插入模式(步驟sn2)的一個 子程序,於該子程序中,當插入一條縫線時,如第45(a) 圖中所示,缝針9會接近位於其後侧上面之裁布刀16位置 ,因而如第45(b)圖中所示,縫針9盡可能地相對於垂直延 伸之裁布刀16而向右擺動,藉以能夠幫助縫線穿過針眼9& 於本缝線插入模式中’如第44圖中所示,在步驟S1121 中檢查設定鍵147,若設定鍵147開啟的話,則前進至下一 個步驟S1122,否則若設定鍵ι47未開啟的話,則直接前 進至上述通用流程圖(第37圖)中的步驟S2。 於步驟S1122中檢查基線進給脈衝馬達4〇之輸出是否 為右側最大值,若其非右側最大值的話,則在下一個步驟 SU23中,藉由脈衝馬達驅動裝置112驅動基線進給脈衝馬 達40,使其能夠提供右侧最大值,之後前進至步驟sn27 ;若基線進給脈衝馬達40之輸出為右側最大值的話,則直 接前進至步驟S1127。 而且,於步驟31127_檢查擺動寬度脈衝馬達(縫針擺 動進給脈衝馬達)41之輸出是否為〇,亦即擺動寬度脈衝馬 達4〗之輸出是否位於上述之基線上面。若其為〇的話則 直接前進至上述通用流程囷(第37圖)中的步驟S2;否則若 -----------1 ,裝--- (請t閲讀背面之注意事項再填窝本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製402649 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (54 If the printed code [6] of the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is below, proceed directly to step S1065. In step S1065, check the negative key 143 'If the negative key 143 is turned on' Then in the next step S1066, the pattern number is decreased by 1, and then proceed to the next step S1067; otherwise, if the minus key is not turned on, it will directly proceed to step S2 in the above general flow chart (Figure 37). In S1 067, check the pattern number 'If the case number is less than the smallest number [1]', then in the next step S1068, set the case number to the largest number [6] 'and then proceed to the general flow chart (Figure 37). Step S2 ° Now the 42nd step shows a subroutine of the parameter changing program (step SiO8). In step S1081, the positive key is checked first. If the positive key ι44 is turned on, then the next step S 1082 , The pattern number is increased by 1 ', and then proceed to the next step S1083; otherwise, if the plus key 144 is not turned on, directly proceed to step S1085. In step S1083, check the pattern number, if If the pattern number exceeds the maximum number [19] ', then in the next step si〇84, set the pattern number to Π]' and then proceed to the next step S1085; otherwise, if the pattern number is below [19] ', proceed directly to Step sl85. In step S1085, the negative key 143 is checked. If the negative key 143 is turned on, then the pattern number is decreased by 1 in the next step S1 〇86, and then proceed to the next step S1087; otherwise, if the negative number If the key 143 is not turned on, proceed directly to step S1089. In step S1087, check the pattern number. If the pattern number is less than the minimum number [1], then set the pattern number as the most in the next step 81088. Please read the notes on the back. / Re {Spirit-bound bookbinding t This paper is again applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 public love) 37 A7 402649 ------ B7______ 5. Description of the invention (55) Large number [19 ], And then proceed to the next step si 089; otherwise, if the pattern number is not less than the minimum number [1], directly proceed to step S1 〇89. Moreover, in step S1089, there is a corresponding to the parameter number The desired data changing program is executed by operating the down button 145 or the up button 146, and then proceeds to the above-mentioned step S2. Now, Fig. 43 shows a subroutine 'of the speed changing program (step S110) in this subroutine Complete the sewing machine speed change program. In the sewing machine speed, a setting range from [400] to [4000] 'is used and its change unit is [1〇0] as the number of stitches per minute [spm], that is, Stitches / minute. In this speed changing program, as shown in FIG. 43, the upper key 146 is first checked in step S1101. If the upper key 146 is turned on, the speed data is increased by 1 in the next step S1102, and then the process proceeds to the next step. S1103; otherwise, if the up button 146 is not turned on, it proceeds directly to step S1105. Check the speed data in step S1103. If the speed data exceeds the maximum value [4000], set the speed data to [400] in the next step s 1104 and proceed to the next step sil 〇5; otherwise, if the speed data is less than If the maximum value is [4000], the process proceeds directly to step s 11 05. In step S1105, check the down button 145. If the down button is turned on, the speed data is increased by 100 in the next step S1106, and then proceed to the next step S1107; otherwise, if the down button is not turned on, then proceed to the above general Step S2 in the flowchart (Figure 37). In step S1107, check the speed data. If the speed data is smaller than the minimum paper size, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297) is applicable. I —— I -1 — II III ^ — — — — — — — — --- II-- ♦ (Please read the “Precautions on the back of the waiver before filling out this page first”) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs -58-4〇2649 A7 — ~~ --- 2Z____ V. Description of the Invention (56) If the value is [400], set the speed data to the maximum value [4000] in the next step su〇8, and then proceed to step S2 in the general flow chart (picture) above; otherwise, if the speed data If it is not less than the minimum value [4〇〇], proceed directly to the above step S2. Now, Fig. 44 shows a subroutine of the suture insertion mode (step sn2). In this subroutine, when a seam is inserted When threading, as shown in Fig. 45 (a), the needle 9 will approach the position of the cutting knife 16 located on the upper side of the needle. Therefore, as shown in Fig. 45 (b), the needle 9 will be as close as possible to Vertically extending cloth cutter 16 swings to the right to help the suture pass through the eye 9 & the suture In the insert mode, as shown in FIG. 44, the setting key 147 is checked in step S1121. If the setting key 147 is turned on, it proceeds to the next step S1122, otherwise, if the setting key ι47 is not turned on, it proceeds directly to the above. Step S2 in the general flow chart (Figure 37). In step S1122, check whether the output of the baseline feed pulse motor 4 is the right maximum value. If it is not the right maximum value, then in the next step SU23, The pulse motor driving device 112 drives the baseline feed pulse motor 40 so that it can provide the right maximum value, and then proceeds to step sn27; if the output of the baseline feed pulse motor 40 is the right maximum value, it proceeds directly to step S1127. And, in step 31127_, check whether the output of the swing width pulse motor (needle swing feed pulse motor) 41 is 0, that is, whether the output of the swing width pulse motor 4 is above the above baseline. If it is 0, then directly Proceed to step S2 in the above general process 囷 (Figure 37); otherwise, if --------- 1, install --- (please read the precautions on the back and fill in the nest Page) Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Office employees consumer cooperatives printed

本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

402649 其不為0的話’則在下一個步驟81128中,擺動寬度脈衝 馬達(縫針擺動進給脈衝馬達)41被縫針擺動進給脈衝馬達 驅動裝置114驅動至〇的位置,之後前進至上述通用流程圖 (第37圖)中的步驟S2。 如上所述,於縫線插入程序中,若有—位操作人員於 面板上操作設定鍵丨47,則如第45(b)圖中所示,縫針9可 相對於垂直延伸之裁布刀16而擺動至最右邊,使其能夠幫 助縫線穿過針眼9a。此外如第46圖中所示,即使在最後— 根縫針相對於裁布刀16而掉落在左側上面的情況中,若縫 針9盡可能地相對於裁布刀16而同樣地向右擺動的話,則 其能夠容易地使縫線穿過針眼9a。 除了上述縫針向右擺動而超過由設定鍵147操作之裁 布刀的控制之外,亦可使用另一種控制方法,其中當一縫 幼機停止指令於鈕孔補縫形成期間發出時,縫紉機根據其 固定位置停止程序,經由一類似程序至稍後敘述的一個步 驟S1624 ’而在縫針上方位置處被迫停止,同時如上所述 ,縫針被迫盡可能向右擺動。 再者,於當縫紉機在縫合過程期間被迫停止時所進行 之縫針擺動控制中,本子程序可以透過選擇開關u丨及設 定鍵147而設定成將右側停止位置儲存成指定的縫針停止 位置,而且’於上述之縫紉機停止程序中檢查縫針的停止 設定,若設定為右側停止位置,則縫針於其停止之前可以 完全擺向右方。 現在,第47圖繪示了使拉力鉤12頂端i2a與縫針9軸一 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐〉 (請t閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 ----訂--------:r 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製402649 If it is not 0, then in the next step 81128, the swing width pulse motor (needle swing feed pulse motor) 41 is driven to the position of 0 by the needle swing feed pulse motor drive 114, and then proceeds to the above general flow chart. (Figure 37) Step S2. As mentioned above, in the sewing thread insertion procedure, if an operator operates the setting key 47 on the panel, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the needle 9 can be extended relative to the cutting knife 16 extending vertically. And swing to the far right so that it can help the suture pass through the eye 9a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, even in the case where the last-needle is dropped on the left side relative to the cutting blade 16, if the sewing needle 9 swings to the right as much as possible relative to the cutting blade 16, , Then it can easily pass the suture through the eye 9a. In addition to the above-mentioned control of the sewing needle swinging to the right beyond the cutting knife operated by the setting key 147, another control method can also be used. When a sewing machine stop command is issued during the formation of a buttonhole joint, the sewing machine The fixed position stop procedure is forced to stop at a position above the needle through a similar procedure to a step S1624 ′ described later, and at the same time, as described above, the needle is forced to swing to the right as much as possible. Furthermore, in the needle swing control performed when the sewing machine is forced to stop during the sewing process, this subroutine can be set to store the right stop position as the designated needle stop position through the selection switch u 丨 and the setting key 147, and 'Check the stop setting of the needle in the sewing machine stop procedure described above. If it is set to the right stop position, the needle can fully swing to the right before it stops. Now, Figure 47 shows the paper size of the top end of the pull hook 12 i2a and the needle 9 axis. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back and fill in this page. ) Packing ---- Order --------: r Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

W A7 B7 4〇2649 五、發明說明() 致之拉力鉤匹配模式(步驟S114)的一個子程序,於此子程 序中,如第48(a)及48(b)圖中所示,首先位於裁布刀16前 方之縫針9移動至布料針形金屬板50之孔50a(位於刀槽5〇b 之延伸部分上面)中心,如第48(c)圖中所示,縫針9受到 控制使其位於縫針擺動位置,讓縫針9與拉力鉤12同軸。 而且’如第48(c)至48(d)圖中所示,針天心8自其停止 位置下降通過最低點’而在稍高的一個位置(拉力鉤匹配 時間位置)處停止,於此位置處進行匹配程序。 於本拉力鉤匹配模式中,如第47圖中所示,首先在步 戰S1141中檢查設定鍵147,若設定鍵147開啟的話,則進 行至下一個步驟S1142 ;否則若設定鍵147未開啟的話, 則直接前進至上述通用流程圖(第37圖)中的步驟S2。 於步驟S1142中檢查基線進給脈衝馬達4〇之輸出是否 為〇,若其不為〇的話,則在下一個步驟81143中,藉由基 線進給脈衝馬達驅動裝置112將基線進給脈衝馬達4〇堪動 至〇的位置處,•否則若其為0的話’則直接進行至步驟 S1147。 而且,在步驟S1147中檢查擺動寬度脈衝馬達(縫針擺 動進給脈衝馬達)41之輪出是否為〇,若其為〇的話,則直 接前進至上述通用流程圖(第37圖)中的步驟S2;否則若其 不為0的話,則在下一個步驟S1148中,擺動寬度脈衝馬 達(縫針擺動進給脈衝馬達)41由縫針擺動進給脈衝馬達驅 動裝置114加以驅動’之後前進至上述通用流程圖(第3 中的步驟S2 » 本紙張尺度翻+目國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公愛j--~_______ ------------- t ---— II--訂------11緣 η (請先閲諫背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 402649 發明說明(’ 藉由上述之操作,於拉力鉤匹配模式中,縫針藉由控 制設定鍵147而擺向與拉力鉤12之軸對應的縫針擺動位置( 縫針擺動範圍中心),之後縫針軸與拉力鉤頂端經過調整 ’使其等能夠彼此—致。 精後將敘述另一種控制系統,若主軸之轉動狀態被偵 測出’藉以控制縫鲂機之驅動馬達的停止,則不僅缝針擺 動控制、而且縫針垂直移動位置控制都能自動而連續地完 成。 現在第49圖繪示了縫合資料建立程序(步驟S3)的一個 子程序,於此子程序中,首先在步驟S31中進行一項放大/ 縮小程序,在下一個步驟S32中,分別檢查壓布機15與裁 布刀16之尺寸,而在下一個步驟S33中檢查尺寸誤差。 而且,若發現壓布機15與裁布刀16之間有一個尺寸誤 差的話,則直接前進至步驟S34將誤差顯示出來,之後前 進至上述通用流程圖(第37圖)中的步驟以。另一方面,若 發現壓布機15與裁布刀16之間沒有尺寸誤差的話,則在下 一個步·37中,|查控制面板114中的上述開關(未示出) ’藉以選擇上述之右旋或左旋縫合,之後前進至步驟奶 或步驟S38。 驟S31 步Γ35或步驟s财執行—項圖案程序,接著於步 =6中執行—項刀具驅動料程序,之後前進至上述通 用仙·程圖(第37圖)中的步驟S4。也 心就是說,於步驟S37中 ’若判疋縫合程序係以右旋方式谁 点士烙鹿办 式進仃,則於步驟S33中完 成右旋圖案程序;否則若判定 吸口程序並非以右旋方式進 本紙張尺度適用中_標準(CNS)A4 “咖χ视公[ I I ί、裝.·1 I (請t閱讀背面之注意事項再填窝本頁) Ίδ1ν · 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 A7 B7 60 五、發明說明( 行,則於步驟S38中進行左旋圖案程序。 接著,下文將依序詳述放大/縮小程序(步驟S川加 壓器/刀具尺寸檢測程序(步驟叫、右旋圖案程序(步驟 35)、刀具驅動定時程序(S36)' ^左旋圖案程序(步驟 ’其等分別包括在上述之縫合資料建立程序(步㈣) 現在,第50圖、緣示了放大/縮小程序(步驟s3i)的一個 子程序’於此子程序中,為了完成紐孔織補程序之放大/ 縮小程序,如第51(a)圖中所示,則裁布刀16之前端部分 破用作放大/縮小的-個參考點P,而如第5i(b)圖中所示 ’{平行部分節距e和目㈣線部分節距【}及{布料裁煎長 度a、刀具寬度b、固定縫線長度。和固定缝線寬度匀兩者 、或其中任何一方之設定值受到控制,亦即被放大或縮小 於本缝合資料建立程序中,如第5〇圖中所示於步驟 S3U中首先將放大/縮小比例設定為^,接著在下二個步 驟S3i2中,檢查缝線數目是否為常數,若發現其為常數 的話,則進行至步驟S313;否則若發現其非常數的話, 則進行至步驟S314。 °W A7 B7 4〇2649 V. Description of the Invention () A subroutine of the pull hook matching mode (step S114). In this subroutine, as shown in Figures 48 (a) and 48 (b), first, The needle 9 located in front of the cutting knife 16 moves to the center of the hole 50a (located above the extension of the knife groove 50b) of the cloth needle-shaped metal plate 50. As shown in FIG. 48 (c), the needle 9 is controlled so that It is located at the swing position of the needle, so that the needle 9 and the tension hook 12 are coaxial. And 'as shown in Figures 48 (c) to 48 (d), Needle Heart 8 descends from its stop position to the lowest point' and stops at a slightly higher position (pulling hook matching time position) at this position Matching procedures are performed everywhere. In this pull hook matching mode, as shown in FIG. 47, first check the setting key 147 in step S1141. If the setting key 147 is turned on, proceed to the next step S1142; otherwise, if the setting key 147 is not turned on , Then proceed directly to step S2 in the general flow chart (FIG. 37). In step S1142, it is checked whether the output of the baseline feed pulse motor 4 is 0, if it is not 0, then in the next step 81143, the baseline feed pulse motor 4 is fed by the baseline feed pulse motor drive 112. Can be moved to a position of 0, otherwise, if it is 0, then proceed directly to step S1147. Furthermore, in step S1147, it is checked whether the wheel output of the swing width pulse motor (needle swing feed pulse motor) 41 is 0, and if it is 0, it proceeds directly to step S2 in the general flow chart (FIG. 37). ; Otherwise, if it is not 0, then in the next step S1148, the swing width pulse motor (needle swing feed pulse motor) 41 is driven by the needle swing feed pulse motor drive 114, and then proceeds to the above general flowchart ( Step S2 in Step 3 »Turn this paper into a standard + national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love j-- ~ _______ ------------- t ----- II --Order ------ 11 Yuan η (please read the notes on the back of the page before filling out this page) Printed by A7 402649, Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economics Invention Description ('Through the above operation, In the hook matching mode, the needle is swung to the needle swing position (center of the needle swing range) corresponding to the axis of the tension hook 12 by the control setting key 147, and then the needle shaft and the top of the tension hook are adjusted to make each other equal. . Another control will be described after finishing In the system, if the rotation state of the main shaft is detected to control the stop of the driving motor of the sewing machine, not only the needle swing control but also the vertical movement position control of the needle can be automatically and continuously completed. Now, Figure 49 shows A subroutine of the stitching data creation procedure (step S3) was performed. In this subroutine, an enlargement / reduction procedure is first performed in step S31, and in the next step S32, the cloth press 15 and the cloth cutter 16 are checked separately. And check the dimensional error in the next step S33. Also, if there is a dimensional error between the cloth press 15 and the cutting knife 16, then directly go to step S34 to display the error, and then proceed to the above general The steps in the flowchart (Figure 37) are as follows. On the other hand, if there is no dimensional error between the cloth press 15 and the cutting knife 16, then in the next step · 37, check the above in the control panel 114 Switch (not shown) 'to select the right-handed or left-handed suture described above, and then proceed to step milk or step S38. Step S31 Step Γ35 or Step s execute-item pattern program, and then Execute the item-driven tool program in step = 6, and then proceed to step S4 in the above-mentioned general stroke chart (Fig. 37). That is to say, in step S37, if the judging suture procedure is right-handed If you want to enter the brand, you will complete the right-handed pattern in step S33; otherwise, if it is judged that the mouthpiece program is not right-handed, the paper standard is applicable. Standard (CNS) A4 II ί, installed. · 1 I (please read the notes on the back and fill in the page again) Ίδ1ν · Printed by the Bureau ’s Consumer Cooperatives A7 B7 60 V. Description of the invention (OK, the left-handed pattern procedure is performed in step S38. Next, the enlarging / reducing procedure (step S, pressurizer / tool size detection procedure (step S), right-handed pattern program (step 35), tool driving timing program (S36) ', left-handed pattern program ( Step 'These are included in the above-mentioned stitching data creation procedure (step 分别). Now, Figure 50, a margin shows a subroutine of the enlargement / reduction procedure (step s3i). In this subroutine, in order to complete the buttonhole darning The program is enlarged / reduced. As shown in Fig. 51 (a), the front end of the cutter 16 is broken and used as a reference point P for enlargement / reduction, as shown in Fig. 5i (b). '{Parallel part pitch e and mesh line part pitch [} and {fabric cutting length a, cutter width b, fixed stitch length. Both fixed stitch width and fixed set value are subject to Control, that is, zoom in or out in this stitching data creation program, as shown in Figure 50 in step S3U. First set the zoom in / out ratio to ^, then check the number of sutures in the next two steps S3i2 Whether it is constant, if it is found to be constant, Proceeds to step S313; or, if the number is found, then to step S314 °.

於步驟S313中,分別繪示於第39圖之平行部分節距X α與密線部分節距χ α被設定為平行部分節距e與密線部分 節距f之設定值,之後前進下一個步驟S3丨4。 刀 而且,於步驟S3 14中,布料裁剪長度兀^、刀具寬产X «、密線長度Χα、密線寬度x«、刀具-第—密線長度^ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 訂 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 61 61 ΚΙ 402649 五、發明說明( a 、以及刀具第一密線長度hxa分別被設定為布料裁剪長 度、刀具寬度、固定縫線長度、以及密線寬度之設定值, 之後前進至上述流程圖(第49圖)中的步驟S32。 現在第52圖繪示了加壓器及刀具尺寸檢測程序(步驟 S32)的一個子程序,於此子程序中,根據圖案編號之各參 數設定值,於步驟S321f首先將壓布機15尺寸設為, 接著於步驟S322中將裁布刀16尺寸設為£1,接著於步驟 S323終將整個長度(第51(b)圖)設為L,接著於步驟幻24中 將布料裁剪長度設為a,之後前進至下一個步驟以以。 於步驟S325令檢查L是否大於“,若L不大於l〇的話 ,則進行至下一個步驟S326;否則若L大於“的話則進 行至下一個步驟S327。 訂 於步驟S326中檢查L1是否大於3,若Li不大於&的話, 則前進至上述子程序(第49囷)中的步驟⑷;否則若^大 於a的話’則前進至步驟S327。 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 而且,於步驟S327中,若發現l>l〇、亦即若加壓器 =小於整個長度的話’或者若發現心、亦即若刀具 :寸大於布料裁剪長度的話,則輪出一個加壓器/刀具誤 之後前進至上述第49圖之流程圖中的步驟S33。 ::第53圖繪示了圖案程序(步驟的 ,於下-個步驟咖中,算出=一個縫合起始位置 個步驟⑽中,算出第-密線部^。平行部分,而在下一 而且’在下_個步驟咖中,算出右側平行部分,接 297公釐)In step S313, the parallel part pitch X α and the dense line part pitch χ α shown in FIG. 39 are respectively set to the set values of the parallel part pitch e and the dense line part pitch f, and then advance to the next Step S3 丨 4. In step S314, the cutting length of the cloth is ^^, the width of the cutter is X «, the length of the dense line Xα, the width of the dense line x«, and the length of the cutter-the first-the line of dense ^ This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) Ordered by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 61 61 ΚΙ 402649 V. Description of the invention (a, and the first dense line length hxa of the knife are set to the cloth cutting length, knife width, fixed The setting values of the stitch length and dense thread width, and then proceed to step S32 in the above flow chart (Figure 49). Now Figure 52 shows a subroutine of the presser and tool size detection program (step S32). In this subroutine, according to the parameter setting values of the pattern number, first set the size of the cloth press 15 in step S321f, then set the size of the cloth cutter 16 in step S322 to £ 1, and then in step S323. Finally set the entire length (Figure 51 (b)) to L, then set the cloth cutting length to a in step S24, and then proceed to the next step. In step S325, check whether L is greater than ", if L If it is greater than 10, proceed to the next step S326; otherwise, if L is greater than ", proceed to the next step S327. Check in step S326 to check whether L1 is greater than 3, and if Li is not greater than &, proceed to the above Step ⑷ in the subroutine (49th); otherwise, if ^ is greater than a, then proceed to step S327. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and, in step S327, if l > That is, if the pressurizer = less than the entire length, or if the heart is found, that is, if the cutter: inch is greater than the fabric cutting length, then turn out a presser / tool by mistake and proceed to the flowchart in Figure 49 above. Step S33. :: Figure 53 shows the pattern program (for the next step, in the next step, calculate = one stitching start position, in step ⑽, calculate the-dense line part ^. Parallel part, and in the next First, and in the next step, calculate the right parallel part, then 297 mm)

本紙張尺度_丁—祕+㈣S)A4規格(210T 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 402649 A7 ------------B7___ 五、發明說明(62 ) 著在下一個步驟S355中,算出第二密線部分,而在步驟 S356中’算出縫合末端,之後前進至上述This paper size_ 丁 — 秘 + ㈣S) A4 size (210T printed by the Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 402649 A7 ------------ B7___ V. Description of the invention (62) In the next step In S355, the second dense line portion is calculated, and in step S356, the suture end is calculated, and then proceeds to the above.

圖中的步驟S36e W 接著,下文中將依序詳述包括於上述圖案程序(步驟 S35)中的下列諸項程序:亦即縫合起始位置程序(步驟S351) 、左側平行部分程序(步驟S352)、第一密線部分程序(步 驟S353)、右側平行部分程序(步驟S354)、第二密線部分 程序(步驟S355)、以及縫合結束程序程序(步驟S356)。 於此,在敘述各操作程序之前,將先敘述縫合次序及 條件。 第54圖繪示了縫合次序:尤其是,第54(1)圖繪示了從 機器原點至縫合起始位置的一個步驟、第54(2)圖繪示了 於第54(1)圖中繪示之步驟之後縫合左侧平行部分的一個 步驟、第54(3)圖繪示了將第一密線部分往上縫至其中間 部分的一個步驟、第54(4)圖繪示了將第一密線部分完全 縫合的一個步驟'第54(5)圖繪示了開始縫合右侧平行部 分、第54(6)圖繪示了縫合右側平行部分的一個步驟、第 54(7)圖繪示了開始縫合第二密線部分、第54(8)圖繪示了 將第二密線部分往上縫至其中間部分的一個步驟、而第 54(9)圖繪示了缝合末端(亦即第二密線部分之縫合末端)。 順便提一下’朝原點之移動僅於當縫合模式啟動時進行。 而且’第55圖為繪·示了縫合資料運算結果的一個表格 ’而此運算結果可根據稿後將敘述之第56及63圖中所示的 運算而得到。於此表格中’ N代表重複次數(縫線數目)、 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) in IV illln — --I I I I r (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 五、 發明說明( 63 為y進〜κ為基線、H為擺動寬度、而τ為縫線張力值 ,其等分別與縫合次序(資料點)對應,亦即第54圓中繪示 之⑴、(2)、(3)、⑷、(5)、⑹、⑺、(8)及(9)。 順便提-下,於下列運算中,使用了基於第4〇圖中緣 不之諸項條件的尺寸:也就是說,諸尺寸包括有布料長度a 、刀具寬度b、密線長度£:、密線寬度d、平行部分節距e、 密線部分節距f、裁布刀與第一密線之間和裁布刀與第二 密線之間的間隙長度g。 上述之縫合資料運算結果被儲存在上述之RAM102中 第56圖繪示了縫合起始部分程序(步驟s35i)的—個子 程序,於步驟S3511中,首先算出Yi=c/2,接著在下一個 步驟S3512中算出Kfb/2,接著在下一個步驟S3512中算出 = ,而在下一個步驟中,設定τ]=縫合起始張力。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 而且,於步驟33515中,檢查刀具下降左右侧位置之” 之面板設定值是否為〇,若發現其為〇的話,則前進至上述 第53圖之流程圖中的步驟S352;否則若不為〇的話,則在 下一個步驟S35 16中設定Kl=Kl +[刀具下降左右侧位置], 之後前進至上述步驟S352。 換句話說,若縫合起始位置(Κ〇係根據刀具下降左右 侧位置之設定值而設定的話,則可提供以刀具下降位置作 為中心的一個刀具寬度位置調整函數,亦即如第57圖中所 示’縫線形狀之左右方向中心位置可設定於刀具下降位置 處0 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 402649 A7 B7Step S36e in the figure Next, the following procedures included in the above-mentioned pattern program (step S35) will be described in detail in the following: the stitching start position program (step S351), the left parallel part program (step S352) ), A first dense line part program (step S353), a right parallel part program (step S354), a second dense line part program (step S355), and a stitching end program program (step S356). Here, before describing each operation procedure, the stitching sequence and conditions will be described first. Figure 54 illustrates the stitching sequence: In particular, Figure 54 (1) illustrates a step from the machine origin to the starting position of stitching, and Figure 54 (2) illustrates Figure 54 (1) A step of stitching the left parallel part after the step shown in the middle, FIG. 54 (3) shows a step of sewing the first dense line part to the middle part, and FIG. 54 (4) shows A step of fully stitching the first dense line part 'Fig. 54 (5) shows the step of starting to sew the right parallel part, Fig. 54 (6) shows a step of stitching the right parallel part, 54 (7) The figure shows the start of sewing the second dense line part, figure 54 (8) shows a step of sewing the second dense line part up to the middle part, and figure 54 (9) shows the suture end (That is, the suture end of the second dense line portion). Incidentally, the movement toward the origin is performed only when the stitching mode is activated. Moreover, "Fig. 55 is a table showing the calculation results of stitching data", and this calculation result can be obtained from the calculations shown in Figs. 56 and 63 which will be described later after the draft. In this form, 'N represents the number of repetitions (the number of stitches). This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) in IV illln — --IIII r (Please read the precautions on the back first (Fill in this page again.) 5. Explanation of the invention (63 is y, ~ κ is the baseline, H is the swing width, and τ is the suture tension value, which respectively correspond to the stitching sequence (data points), that is, in the 54th circle. ⑴, (2), (3), ⑷, (5), ⑹, ⑺, (8), and (9) are shown. By the way, in the following calculations, based on the edge in Figure 4 The dimensions of various conditions: that is, the dimensions include cloth length a, cutter width b, dense line length £: dense line width d, parallel part pitch e, dense line part pitch f, cutting cloth The length g of the gap between the knife and the first dense line and between the cutting knife and the second dense line. The above-mentioned stitching data calculation result is stored in the above-mentioned RAM 102. Figure 56 shows the procedure of the stitching start part (step s35i ) —A subroutine. In step S3511, first calculate Yi = c / 2, and then in the next step S3512. Out Kfb / 2, and then calculate = in the next step S3512, and in the next step, set τ] = stitching starting tension. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, and in step 33515, check that the tool is lowered Whether the panel setting value of “side position” is 0, if it is found, proceed to step S352 in the flowchart of FIG. 53 above; otherwise, if it is not 0, set K1 in the next step S35 16. = Kl + [Left and right side positions of the knife lowering], and then proceed to the above step S352. In other words, if the sewing start position (K0 is set according to the setting values of the left and right side positions of the knife lowering), a knife lowering can be provided. Position is a tool width position adjustment function of the center, that is, as shown in Figure 57, the center position of the left and right direction of the suture shape can be set at the position where the tool is lowered. 0 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 210 X 297 mm) 402649 A7 B7

個子t第58圖緣不了左側平行部分運算(步驟S352)的 -個::序,於此子程序中,首先在步驟s352i中設定h ,之後在下-個步驟S3522中,算出Ν2={ — +(雜e 。:此運算方程式中,若改變%而不改變a,則縫線部 分與鈕孔末端部分之間的間隔可以修正。 而且’在下-個步㈣助令設定Μ,在下一個步 驟S3524中設定h2=(),在下―個步驟幻525中設定&平行 4刀張力之後W進至上述第53圖之流程圖中的步驟 現在’第59圓緣示了第—密線部分運算(步驟幻53)的 -個子程序,於此子程序中,首先在步錄奶31中設定Y=f ,在下—個步驟S3532中算出%〜f,在下_個步驟s則 中算出K3 = {(b+d)/2}+ 乂,而之後在下一個步驟中算 H3={(b+d)/2}+ N3。 之後在下一個步驟S3535中,設定τ广密線部分張力, 在下一個步驟S3536中設定Ypf,之後在下一個步驟幻537 中算出N4=c+ f。 而且,在下一個步驟S3538中設定K4=〇,在下一個步 驟S3 539中設定HfO,在下一個步驟S354〇中設定Η*。密線 部分張力,之後前進至上述第53圖之流程圖中的步^s354 順便提一下,第60圖繪示了詳細分析縫合第一密線部 分至其中間部分之步驟所得到的結果,將之繪示於第54圖 之(3)。於此,下文將敘述此例中的縫針擺動機構之運作 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) . ~、裝 訂---------梦 (請t閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 65 A7 B7 五、發明說明(( 原理。 首先,如前所述’縫針9係利用藉由上述具有基線機 構之縫針擺動機構而向左擺動超過基線的一個方式固定, 因此,當縫針9下降至左右侧兩個位置處時,由基線機構 所固定之基線位置為右侧縫針下降位置,而縫針9由以基 線為參考點之縫針擺動機構42所固定而向左擺動一個縫針 擺動量的位置為左側縫針下降位置。 換句話說,第60圖繪示了第54圖之(3)中縫合密線部 分至其中間部分的諸細節,右侧縫針下降點&係位於基線 上面’而除非基線相對於右側縫針下降點n]而改變了—個 可由縫針擺動機構42判定的縫針擺動量Ηι,否則左側縫 針下降點h將位於左側上面。然而,若於左侧縫針下降點 訂 h中,基線向右移動K3,則縫針擺動量必須確保左側縫針 下降點112為Hi+KD。 而且,當左側縫針下降點以變成下_個縫針下降點η 時’其位置可藉由基線之設定來判斷。也就是說,由於基 線從縫針下降點〜之基線向右移動Κ3的一個量,因而移動 了 Κ3的基線位置本身即為縫針下降點η3。 同樣地,當右側縫針下降點ηι變成下—個左側縫針 降點〜時,從基線算起之縫針擺動量(從縫針下降點打 基線向右移動反^為士十!!#!!,!^。 3之 再者,當左侧縫針下降點η,變成下一個縫針下降點 時,若基線移動,則移動之基線位置本身提供了縫針下 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公髮) A7 B7 五、發明說明( 66 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 現在’第61㈣示了右侧平行部分運算(步驟S354)的 -個子程序,於此子程序中,首先在步驟奶41中設定Η ,接著在步驟S3542中設定γ㈣,而接著在下—個㈣ S3543中設定Κ5 = 〇。而且’在下—個步驟MW中,算出 H5=(d+b)/2’而之後在下―個步驟奶45中,設定& 部分張力。 而且,在下一個步驟83546中設定Y^e,之後在步驟 S3547中算出N6=(a+h+gK e,接著在步驟s3548中設定Κ6=〇 ’在下-個步㈣549中設定H6=G,在下—個步驟s355〇 中設定T6 =平行部分張力,之後前進至上述第㈣之流程 圖中的步驟S355 » 現在,第62圖繪示了第二密線部分運算(步驟幻55)的 一個子程序,於此子程序中,首先在步驟S355i中設定1 = 1 ,接著在步驟S3552中設定A#,而在下一個步驟s3553 中設定Keo,之後在步驟S3554 ^算出H7=(d+b)/2,之後 在步驟S3555中設定T?=密線部分張力。 而且’在下一個步驟S3556中設定Yff,在下一個步 驟S3 557中算出Ns=c+ f,之後在下一個步驟幻558中,設 定I,在下一個步驟S3559中設定札=〇,在下一個步驟 S3 560中叹疋ts=密線部分張力,而之後前進至上述第 圖之流程圖中的步驟S356» 現在’第63圓繪示了縫合末端處理(步驟s3 56)的一個 子程序’於此子程序中,首先在步驟S3561中設定Y9=:f·, 在下一個步驟S3562中算出N9 = (c/2)+ f,之後在步驟S3563 - --------------J l· I--I,、裝- I I > (請λ·閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)The 58th figure of the sub-t cannot be calculated in the left parallel part (step S352) :: order. In this subroutine, first set h in step s352i, and then in the next step S3522, calculate N2 = {— + (Miscellaneous e .: In this operation equation, if you change% without changing a, the interval between the suture part and the end of the buttonhole can be corrected. Also, in the next step, the help order is set to M, and in the next step S3524 Set h2 = () in the next step, and after setting the & parallel 4-knife tension in the next step 525, go to the steps in the flowchart in the above figure 53. Now the 59th round edge shows the first-dense line operation ( A subroutine of step 53). In this subroutine, first set Y = f in step recording milk 31, calculate% ~ f in the next step S3532, and calculate K3 = {( b + d) / 2} + 乂, and then calculate H3 = {(b + d) / 2} + N3 in the next step. Then in the next step S3535, set the tension of the τ wide-density line, and in the next step S3536 Set Ypf in the next step, and calculate N4 = c + f in the next step, Magic 537. Also, set K4 = in the next step, S3538. HfO is set in the next step S3 539, and Η * is set in the next step S354〇. The tension of the dense thread part is then advanced to step ^ s354 in the flowchart of the above Fig. 53 By the way, Fig. 60 shows Analyze the results of the process of stitching the first dense thread portion to the middle portion in detail, and plot it in (3) of Figure 54. Here, the operation of the needle swing mechanism in this example will be described below. Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm). ~, Binding --------- Dream (Please read the notes on the back and fill in this page) 65 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention ((Principle. First, as described above, the “stitch 9 is fixed by one way that is swung leftward beyond the baseline by the above-mentioned needle swing mechanism with a baseline mechanism. Therefore, when the needle 9 is lowered to two positions on the left and right sides” The baseline position fixed by the baseline mechanism is the right needle down position, while the needle 9 is fixed by the needle swing mechanism 42 with the baseline as the reference point and swings left by one needle swing amount to the left needle drop position. That is, Fig. 60 shows the details of the sutured dense thread part to the middle part in Fig. 54 (3). The right needle drop point & is above the baseline ', unless the baseline is relative to the right needle drop point n. ] And changed a needle swing amount Ηι which can be determined by the needle swing mechanism 42, otherwise the left needle drop point h will be above the left side. However, if the left needle drop point is set to h, the baseline moves K3 to the right, the needle will The amount of swing must ensure that the left needle drop point 112 is Hi + KD. Moreover, when the left needle drop point becomes the next needle drop point η ', its position can be judged by setting the baseline. In other words, since the baseline moves from the needle drop point to the baseline to the right by an amount of K3, the baseline position moved by K3 itself is the needle drop point η3. Similarly, when the right needle drop point η becomes the next left needle drop point ~, the amount of needle swing from the baseline (from the needle drop point to the baseline, move to the right and back ^ is Shi Shi !! # !!,! ^. 3 Furthermore, when the left needle drop point η becomes the next needle drop point, if the baseline moves, the baseline position itself provides the paper size under the needle applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 210 X 297) A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (66 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Now the "61st" shows a subroutine of the parallel operation on the right (step S354). In this subroutine, First set Η in step milk 41, then set γ㈣ in step S3542, and then set κ5 = 〇 in the next ㈣ S3543. And 'in the next step MW, calculate H5 = (d + b) / 2' And then in the next step milk 45, set & partial tension. Also, set Y ^ e in the next step 83546, and then calculate N6 = (a + h + gK e) in step S3547, and then set in step s3548. Κ6 = 〇 'in the next step Set H6 = G in 549, set T6 = parallel tension in the next step s355〇, and then proceed to step S355 in the first flowchart above »» Now, figure 62 shows the second dense line operation ( A subroutine of step 55). In this subroutine, first set 1 = 1 in step S355i, then set A # in step S3552, and set Keo in the next step s3553, and then calculate H7 = in step S3554. (d + b) / 2, and then set T? = dense thread tension in step S3555. Also, set Yff in the next step S3556, calculate Ns = c + f in the next step S3 557, and then perform 558 in the next step. In the next step, set I, set Z = 0 in the next step S3559, and sigh ts = tension in the dense line in the next step S3 560, and then proceed to step S356 in the flowchart of the above figure »Now the 63rd circle A subroutine of suture end processing (step s3 56) is shown. In this subroutine, first set Y9 =: f · in step S3561, and calculate N9 = (c / 2) + f in the next step S3562. Then in step S3563--------------- J l · I--I ,, -I I > (Please read the precautions on the back and fill in this page)

-SJ ^ί . 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格咖χ撕 69" A7 67 五、發明說明( 中算出 K9=(b+d)/2+ N9。 而且’在下一個步驟S3564中算出H9 = (b + d)/24· N9,在 下一個步驟S3565中設定丁9=缝合末端張力,在下一個步 驟S3566中算出總縫線數目Ν=9 Σ n=2Nn,之後前進至上述 第49圖之流程圖中的步驟S36。 接著’第64圏繪示了刀具驅動時間處理(步驟S36)的 一個子程序,於此例中,如第65圖的一個表格中所示對 應於刀具驅動編號1〜η之刀具驅動處理時間提供了縫線編 號Μ广Μη,而此子程序之諸項條件如 第66圖中所示。 上述之刀具驅動縫線編號Μι〜Μη係對應於刀具驅動編 號1〜π’並儲存於上述之ram1〇2中。 在本刀具驅動時間處理中,如第64圖中所示,首先在 步驟S 3 61中算出到達右侧平行部分起始位置之縫線數目 Μ=5 Σ η=2Νη,在下一個步驟 S362 中算出 Mn=((Li+g)+ e+M) 而在下一個步驟S363中’如上所述,由於刀具尺寸較 布料裁剪長度(側邊縫線部分)為短,因此有一個尺寸係將 布料裁剪長度減去刀具尺寸而得到之餘數,亦即算出x=a_ L,。 而且,在下—個步驟S364中檢查是否x=〇,若其不為〇 的話,則在下一個步驟S365中將η增加1,之後前進至下 一個步驟S366;否則若χ=0的話,則直接前進至步驟S37〇 〇 於步驟S366中’檢查是否x>(Li_L α ),於此,[α為 刀具之重疊量。 ---— l·-:· — — — — IV.·、裝!— 訂--ill· — .^ (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 i紙張尺度適用中_家標準(CNS)A4規格⑽χ 29 ) 68 A7 68 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 五、發明說明( 也就是說,於步驟S366中,若x>(Li_Li〇的話則 下一個步驟S367中算出Mn={(Li_La)+ 6}+乂1;否則若 非χ>(Ιμ-Ι^ )的話,前進至步驟S368算出Μη=χ+ 〇。 再者,當Mn={(L「La Η 之運算完成後,在下 一個步驟S369中翼中χ-γ η τ ^、,+ & π μ τ弃出x-x^m-L α ),之後回到上述步 S364 » 此外,#Mn=x+ e之運算完成後,在下一個步驟幻川 中檢查刀具下降時間修正縫線數目是否為0,若為〇的話, 則直接前進至上述通用流程圖(第37圖)中的步驟§4;否則 若不為0的話,則在下一個步驟3371中,將Mn設定為Μ〆 刀具下降時間修正縫線數目,之後前進至上述步驟Μ。 順便提一下,於兩次之裁布刀16垂直或上下移動中, 如第68(a)圖中所示,對於藉由裁布刀16第一次垂直移動 而形成一特定鈕孔所需的一個裁剪長度而言,布料被裁剪 之長度係與裁布刀16之裁剪邊緣長度一致,而之後藉由裁 布刀16第二次垂直移動,將布料的其餘部分裁剪成所需之 裁剪長度。 於上述之兩次裁布刀16垂直移動中,如第69(a)圖中 所示,第一次與第二次之刀具下降會彼此重疊,使其能夠 應付所需之裁剪長度,而重疊長度本身可以設成較大值, 視紐孔長度而定,例如第69(b)圖中所示。 而且’在兩次以上(n次)包括有上述兩次刀具下降之 刀具下降中’如第70圖中所示’介於第一密線部分(後側 祖線部分)與第一次刀具下降部分之間的一個間隙被設定 本紙張尺度_ Τ關家標準(CNS)A4規格咖χ撕公餐) 7Τ I - I I---in----訂--!ι·—ι·# (請先閲讀背面之沒意事項再填寫本頁) A7 69 五、發明說明( 為g,而介於第二密線部分(前侧密線部 降部分之間的一個間隙被設定為h 、n_人刀具下 由改變各刀具下降時間而加以修正。其間的間隙分別藉 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 也就是說,如第70圖中的箭頭所示, 精由改變第一-欠 刀具下降時間,則第-密線部分(後侧密線部分)與第一: 刀具下降部分之間的間隙8得以修正;而藉由改變第」 具下降時間,則第二密線部分(後侧密線部分)與第刀 具下降部分之間的間隙h得以修正。 火 而且’如上述步驟S370及371之結杲轿-似 Ό果所不,從第71圖 中可看出,介於第一密線部分(後侧密線部分)與第—欠刀 具下降部分之間的一個間隙被設定為§,而介於第二^線 部分(前側密線部分)與第η次刀具下降部分之間的—個間 隙被設定為h,且當前侧及後側間隙之總和固定不變時, 則整個刀具下降位置可以改變。 也就是說’當(g+h)任意設成常數時,如第71圖中所 示’則整個刀具下降位置可朝γ方向移動。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 接著’第72囷繪示了機器原點復位程序(步驟S5)的一 個子程序’於此子程序中,首先在步驟S51中驅動Y進給 脈衝馬達20,並檢查γ進給原點感測器26,藉以回復γ進 給脈衝馬達20之原點位置。當γ進給脈衝馬達2〇之原點復 位後’在下一個步驟S52中,將Y進給位置設定為〇。 接著,在步驟S53令驅動基線進給脈衝馬達40,並檢 査基線進給原點感測器57,藉以恢復基線進給脈衝馬達40 之原點位置。之後,在下一個步驟S54中,將基線進給位 77 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐) A7 B7 70 五、發明說明( 置設定為0。 而且’在下一個步驟S55中驅動縫針擺動進給脈衝馬 達41 ’並檢查縫針擺動原點感測器58,藉以恢復縫針擺動 進給脈衝馬達41之原點位置。接著,在下一個步驟S56中 ’將縫針擺動進給位置設定為〇。之後,前進至上述通用 流程圖(第37囷)中的步驟S6。 接著’第37圖繪示了縫合程序(步驟si 5)的一個子程 序,於此子程序t,首先在步驟S151中將總縫線數目設 定為剩餘缝線數目,而在下一個步驟S152中檢查缝針擺 動左右側偵測感測器5 9,判定目前之縫針擺動位置是否在 右側(基線側)’若在右侧的話,則在下一個步驟S15 3中執 行一項縫切機啟動輸出’之後前進至下一個步驟Sly。 此外,若目前之缝針擺動位置不在右側的話,則前進 至步驟S154執行一項縫纫機啟動輸出,之後前進至下一 個步驟S156。 於步驟S155中’檢査來自縫紉機編碼器119之脈衝, 判定縫紉機狀態是否處於旋轉狀態,若其為旋轉狀態的話 ,則前進至下一個步驟S158;否則的話,則回到步驟Sl55 〇 而且,於步*S156中,檢查來自縫紉機編碼器u9之 脈衝’判定縫紉機狀態是否處於旋轉狀態,若其為旋轉狀 態的話,則前進至下一個步驟S〗57 ;否則的話,則回到 步驟S1 56 »接著’於步驟S1 57中檢查缝針上方位置感測 器116 ’判斷中斷控制器ι〇8内是否產生一個縫針上方 木紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(綱x 297公髮 I I ^ I I I--, ' ---- I I 訂----.1----綠 (請先H讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 A7 、發明說明 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 斷要求’若縫針上方位置中斷要求存在的話,則前進至 下—個步驟S158;否則若縫針上方位置中斷要求不存在 的話’則回到步驟S157。 而且’在步驟S158中’檢查來自縫紉機編碼器119之 脈衝,判定縫紉機狀態是否處於旋轉狀態,若其為旋轉狀 態的話,則前進至下一個步驟S159 ;否則的話,則前進 至上述通用流程圓(第37圖)中的步驟S16。 於步驟S159中,在檢測TG產生器118時,判定中斷控 制器108内是否產生一個tg中斷要求,若Tg中斷要求存 在的話,則在下一個步驟S160中執行TG中斷處理,之後 前進至下一個步驟S161;否則若TG中斷要求不存在的話 ’則直接前進至步驟S161。 於步驟S161中,判定中斷控制器ι〇8内是否產生一個 縫針上方位置中斷要求,若縫針上方位置中斷要求存在的 話,則在下一個步驟S160中執行縫針上方位置中斷處理 ,之後前進至下一個步驟S163 ;否則若縫針上方位置中 斷要求不存在的話,則直接前進至步驟S163。 於步驟S163中,在檢測進給參考位置感測器117時, 判定中斷控制器108内是否產生一個進給參考中斷要求, 若進給參考中斷要求存在的話’則在下—個步驟“Μ中 執行進給參考中斷處理,之後前進至下—個步称si65; 否則若進給參考中斷要求不存在的話,則直接前進至步驟 S165。 接著,在下一個步驟S165中執行一項裁布刀計數器 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 線“ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)-SJ ^ ί. This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size coffee x 69 " A7 67 V. Description of the invention (Calculate K9 = (b + d) / 2 + N9. And 'in the next step S3564 Calculate H9 = (b + d) / 24 · N9, set Ding 9 = suture end tension in the next step S3565, calculate the total number of sutures N = 9 Σ n = 2Nn in the next step S3566, and then proceed to the 49th above. Step S36 in the flowchart of the figure. Next, the 64th step shows a subroutine of the tool driving time processing (step S36). In this example, as shown in a table in FIG. 65, it corresponds to the tool driving number. The tool drive processing time from 1 to η provides the suture number ΜΜΜη, and the conditions of this subroutine are shown in Figure 66. The aforementioned tool drive suture numbers Μι ~ Μη correspond to the tool drive number 1 ~ Π 'and stored in the above-mentioned ram10. In this tool driving time process, as shown in FIG. 64, the number of sutures reaching the starting position of the parallel portion on the right side M is first calculated in step S361. = 5 Σ η = 2Nη, calculate Mn = ((Li + g) + e + in the next step S362 M) And in the next step S363, 'As mentioned above, because the cutter size is shorter than the cut length of the fabric (side seam part), there is a size which is the remainder obtained by subtracting the cutter size from the cut length of the fabric, that is, Calculate x = a_L ,. Moreover, in the next step S364, check whether x = 〇, if it is not 0, then increase η by 1 in the next step S365, and then proceed to the next step S366; otherwise, if χ If = 0, proceed directly to step S37〇 In step S366, 'check whether x > (Li_L α), where [α is the overlap amount of the tool. ---— l ·-: · — — — — IV. ·, Installed! — Order --ill · —. ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Consumption Du Printing i Paper Standards Applicable_Home Standards (CNS) A4 specification ⑽χ 29) 68 A7 68 A7 Consumption cooperation between employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Du printed five. Description of the invention (that is, in step S366, if x > (Li_Li〇, the next step S367 calculates Mn = {(Li_La) + 6} + 乂 1; Otherwise, if it is not χ > (Ιμ-Ι ^), before Go to step S368 to calculate Μη = χ + 〇. Furthermore, when Mn = {(L 「La Η operation is completed, in the next step S369 in the wing χ-γ η τ ^ ,, + & π μ τ is discarded xx ^ mL α), and then return to the above step S364 »In addition, after the operation of # Mn = x + e is completed, in the next step, check whether the number of tool drop time correction sutures is 0, and if it is 0, go straight forward Go to step §4 in the above general flow chart (Figure 37); otherwise, if it is not 0, then in the next step 3371, set Mn to Μ〆 tool fall time to correct the number of sutures, and then proceed to the above step Μ . By the way, during the vertical or vertical movement of the cutting knife 16 twice, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), it is necessary for the first vertical movement of the cutting knife 16 to form a specific button hole. In terms of a cutting length, the length of the cloth being cut is the same as the length of the cutting edge of the cutting knife 16, and then the second vertical movement of the cutting knife 16 is used to cut the rest of the cloth to the required cutting length. During the two vertical movements of the cloth cutting knife 16 as shown in FIG. 69 (a), the first and second times of the knife fall will overlap each other, so that they can cope with the required cutting length and overlap. The length itself can be set to a larger value, depending on the buttonhole length, for example, as shown in Figure 69 (b). In addition, “In the case of two or more (n times) tool descent that includes the two tool descents mentioned above”, as shown in FIG. 70, “between the first dense line portion (rear ancestor portion) and the first tool descent A gap between the parts is set to this paper size _ guanguan standard (CNS) A4 size coffee 撕 tear meal) 7T I-I I --- in ---- order-! ι · —ι · # (Please read the unintentional matter on the back before filling this page) A7 69 V. Description of the invention (It is g, which is between the second dense line part (the lower part of the front dense line part) The gaps are set to h and n_ under the tool, which are corrected by changing the falling time of each tool. The gaps in between are borrowed (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). That is, as shown by the arrow in Figure 70 As shown in the figure, by changing the first-to-under tool fall time, the gap 8 between the first-dense line portion (the rear-side dense line portion) and the first: the lower portion of the tool is corrected; and by changing the first Time, the gap h between the second dense line portion (the rear dense line portion) and the falling portion of the first cutter is corrected. The fire is also 'as in the case of the above steps S370 and 371-as the result is, from the first It can be seen in the figure 71 that a gap between the first dense line portion (rear side dense line portion) and the first-lower tool falling portion is set to §, and the second dense line portion (front side dense line) Part) and a gap between the n-th tool descent part is set to h, and When the sum of the front and rear clearances is constant, the entire tool lowering position can be changed. That is, 'When (g + h) is arbitrarily set to a constant, as shown in Figure 71', the entire tool lowering position is It can be moved in the direction of γ. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, and then a subroutine of the machine origin reset procedure (step S5) is shown in the 72nd step. In this subroutine, it is first driven in step S51. The Y-feed pulse motor 20 is checked and the γ-feed origin sensor 26 is checked to restore the origin position of the γ-feed pulse motor 20. When the origin of the γ-feed pulse motor 20 is reset 'in the next step S52 In step S, the Y feed position is set to 0. Next, in step S53, the baseline feed pulse motor 40 is driven, and the baseline feed origin sensor 57 is checked to restore the origin position of the baseline feed pulse motor 40. After that, in the next step S54, the baseline feed position is 77. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × 297 mm) A7 B7 70 V. Description of the invention (set to 0. And 'in the next One step S55 Drive the needle swing feed pulse motor 41 'and check the needle swing origin sensor 58 to restore the origin position of the needle swing feed pulse motor 41. Next, in the next step S56,' set the needle swing feed position to 〇. Then, proceed to step S6 in the above-mentioned general flowchart (37th). Next, FIG. 37 shows a subroutine of the stitching procedure (step si 5), and in this subroutine t, first in step S151 The total number of stitches is set to the number of remaining stitches, and in the next step S152, the left and right side detection sensors 59 of the needle swing are checked to determine whether the current needle swing position is on the right (baseline side). If it is on the side, it proceeds to the next step Sly after executing a sewing machine start output 'in the next step S153. In addition, if the current needle swing position is not on the right, proceed to step S154 to execute a sewing machine start output, and then proceed to the next step S156. In step S155, 'check the pulse from the sewing machine encoder 119 to determine whether the state of the sewing machine is in a rotating state. If it is a rotating state, proceed to the next step S158; otherwise, return to step S155. * In S156, check the pulse from the encoder u9 of the sewing machine 'to determine whether the sewing machine is in a rotating state. If it is rotating, proceed to the next step S〗 57; otherwise, return to step S1 56 »Next' In step S1 57, the position sensor 116 above the needle is judged to determine whether a wood paper above the needle is generated in the interrupt controller ι 08. The size of the Chinese paper (CNS) A4 (Grade x 297) II ^ II I -, '---- Order II ----. 1 ---- Green (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) The Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs's Consumer Cooperatives printed A7 and explained the economy of the economy Ministry of Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumer cooperative prints the breaking request 'If the position interruption request above the needle exists, proceed to the next step S158; otherwise, if the position interruption request above the needle does not exist 'Then return to step S157. And' in step S158 ', check the pulse from the sewing machine encoder 119 to determine whether the state of the sewing machine is in a rotating state, and if it is a rotating state, proceed to the next step S159; otherwise, then Proceed to step S16 in the above-mentioned general flow circle (FIG. 37). In step S159, when the TG generator 118 is detected, it is determined whether a tg interrupt request is generated in the interrupt controller 108, and if a Tg interrupt request exists, then TG interrupt processing is performed in the next step S160, and then proceeds to the next step S161; otherwise, if the TG interrupt request does not exist, then it directly proceeds to step S161. In step S161, it is determined whether an interrupt controller ι〇8 generates a Needle position interruption request. If the need for position interruption above the needle exists, then execute the needle position interruption processing in the next step S160, and then proceed to the next step S163; otherwise, if the needle position interruption request does not exist, proceed directly Go to step S163. In step S163, the feed reference position sensor is detected At 117 hours, it is determined whether a feed reference interrupt request is generated in the interrupt controller 108. If the feed reference interrupt request exists, then the feed reference interrupt processing is performed in the next step "M, and then proceeds to the next step. si65; Otherwise, if the feed reference interruption request does not exist, proceed directly to step S165. Then, in the next step S165, execute a cloth cutter counter (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

402649 A7 402649 A7 72 B7 五、發明說明(一) 斷處理’之後回到上述步驟S158。 接著,下文中將依序詳述TG中斷處理(步驟S160)、縫 針上方位置中斷處理(步驟S162)'進給參考中斷處理(步 驟S164)、以及裁布刀計數器中斷處理(步驟S165),其等 分別包含在縫合程序(步驟S15)中。 現在’第74圏繪示了 TG中斷處理(步驟S160)的一個子 輕序’於此子程序中,首先在步驟Sl601中將tg計數增加 1,而在下一個步驟sl6〇2中,檢查TG計數是否為Q ,若Tg 汁數為Q的話,則前進至下一個步驟sl6〇3;否則若其不 為Q的話’則直接前進至步驟S1612。 於步驟S1603中,檢查γ進給脈衝數目是否為〇,若其 為〇的話,則直接前進至步驟S1606;否則若其不為〇的話 ’則前進至下一個步驟S1604 ^於步驟sl6〇4中,有一個 對應於縫合中Y進給速度之計數值被輸出至γ進給計數器 103,接著·.在步驟S1605中,γ進給計數器1〇3啟動,之後 前進至步驟S1606 » 於步驟S 1606中,檢查由基線進給計數器1〇4計數之基 線脈衝數目是否為0’若其為〇的話,則直接前進至步驟 S1609;否則若其不為〇的話,則前進至下一個步驟si6〇7 。於步驟S1607中’有-個對應於縫合中基線進給速度之 計數值被輸出至基線進給計數器1〇4,在下一個步驟si6〇8 中,基線進給計數器1G4啟動,之後前進至下—個步驟 S1609 。 於步驟S1謝中,檢查由縫針擺動進給計數器⑼計數 ------- ----f 裝--------訂---------_ (請先閱tt:面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21() x 297 ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 __B7 __ 五、發明說明(73 ) 之縫針擺動進給脈衝數目是否為〇,若其為〇的話,則直接 刖進至步驟S1612;否則若其不為〇的話,則前進至下一 個步驟S1610。於步驟8161〇中,有一個對應於縫合中縫 針擺動進給速度之計數值被輸出至縫針擺動進給計數器 1〇5,在下一個步驟S1611中,縫針擺動進給計數器105啟 動’之後前進至下一個步驟S1612。402649 A7 402649 A7 72 B7 V. Description of the invention (1) Interrupt processing 'After that, it returns to the above step S158. Next, the TG interruption processing (step S160), the position interruption processing above the needle (step S162), the feed reference interruption processing (step S164), and the cutter counter interruption processing (step S165) will be described in detail in order. Etc. are included in the stitching procedure (step S15). Now "the 74th frame shows a sub-light sequence of TG interrupt processing (step S160)" In this subroutine, first, the tg count is incremented by 1 in step S6011, and in the next step sl602, the TG count is checked If it is Q, if the number of Tg juice is Q, proceed to the next step sl0603; otherwise, if it is not Q, then proceed directly to step S1612. In step S1603, check whether the number of γ feed pulses is 0. If it is 0, proceed directly to step S1606; otherwise, if it is not 0, proceed to the next step S1604 ^ in step sl604. A count value corresponding to the Y feed speed in the stitching is output to the γ feed counter 103, and then ... In step S1605, the γ feed counter 10 is started, and then proceeds to step S1606 »At step S 1606 Check whether the number of baseline pulses counted by the baseline feed counter 104 is 0 '; if it is 0, proceed directly to step S1609; otherwise, if it is not 0, proceed to the next step si6〇7 . In step S1607, 'there is a count value corresponding to the baseline feed speed in the suture is output to the baseline feed counter 104. In the next step si608, the baseline feed counter 1G4 is started, and then proceeds to the next- Steps S1609. In step S1, check the count by the needle swing feed counter ⑼ ------------------------------------------------ (Please read the tt: Note above and fill in this page again.) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs's Consumer Cooperatives. This paper is printed in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (21 () x 297). System A7 __B7 __ 5. Description of the invention (73) Whether the number of needle swing feed pulses is 0, if it is 0, directly advance to step S1612; otherwise, if it is not 0, proceed to the next step S1610. In step 8161, a count value corresponding to the needle swing feed speed during sewing is output to the needle swing feed counter 105, and in the next step S1611, the needle swing feed counter 105 is started, and then proceeds to the next One step S1612.

而且,於步驟S1612中檢查TG計數是否為s,若其為S 的話,則在下一個步驟31613中,有一個縫線張力代碼被 輸出至縫線張力,之後前進至上述第73圖之流程圖中的步 驟S161;否則若TG計數不為8的話,則直接前進至上述步 驟S161 〇 接著,第75圖繪示了縫針上方位置中斷處理(步驟 S1629)的一個子程序,於此子程序中,首先在步驟si62i 中將剩餘縫線數目減少1,在下一個步驟S1622中,將縫 線數目計數增加1,之後前進至下一個步驟$1623。 於步驟S1623中,檢查剩餘縫線數目是否為〇,若其為 〇的話,則在下一個步驟S1624中執行一項縫紉機停止輸 出;否則若其不為〇的話,則直接前進至步驟S1625。 而且,於步驟S1 625中執行一項刀具驅動程序,之後 前進至上述第73圖之流程圖中的步驟si 63。 現在,第76圖繪示了縫針上方位置中斷處理(步驟si62) 的一個子程序,於此子程序中,首先在步驟Sl625i中檢 查縫線數目計數是否為]^,,,若縫線數目計數為Mn_5的 話’則前進至下一個步驟S16252;否則若縫線數目11計數 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)Furthermore, in step S1612, it is checked whether the TG count is s. If it is S, then in the next step 31613, a suture tension code is output to the suture tension, and then proceeds to the above-mentioned flowchart in FIG. 73. Step S161; otherwise, if the TG count is not 8, proceed directly to the above step S161. Next, Fig. 75 shows a subroutine for the interruption processing of the position above the stitch (step S1629). In this subroutine, first, In step si62i, the number of remaining sutures is reduced by 1, and in the next step S1622, the count of the number of sutures is increased by 1 before proceeding to the next step $ 1623. In step S1623, it is checked whether the number of remaining stitches is 0. If it is 0, a sewing machine is stopped in the next step S1624; otherwise, if it is not 0, the process proceeds directly to step S1625. Further, a tool driver is executed in step S1 625, and thereafter, the process proceeds to step si 63 in the flowchart of FIG. 73 described above. Now, Fig. 76 shows a subroutine of the position interruption processing (step si62) above the needle. In this subroutine, first check whether the number of stitches is counted in step S625i, and, if the number of stitches is counted If it is Mn_5, then proceed to the next step S16252; otherwise, if the number of stitches is 11 counts, the paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)

— — — — — — ΊΙΙΙΙΙ^-ν - l· I (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) --線. 訂 A7 ^02649 五、發明說明( 不為Mn-5的話,則直接前進至步驟S16261。 於步驟S16252中,檢查前一個刀具向下縫線數目Μ。 與後一個刀具向下縫線數目Μη+ι之間的差異Μη+广乂是否 為1 ’若其為1的話,則前進至步驟S16253,將缝紉機速 度設定為4〇〇[spm],之後前進至步驟S16261 ;否則若 Μη+ι-Μη不為1的話,則前進至下一個步驟si6254。 於步驟S16254中,檢查Mn+1-Mn是否為2,若其為2的 話,則前進至步驟S16255,將縫紉機速度設定為1〇〇〇[spm] ,之後前進至步驟S16261;否則若Mn+1-Mn不為2的話,則 前進至下一個步驟S1 6256。 於步驟S162 56中’檢査Mn + 1-Mn是否為3,若其為3的 話’則前進至步驟S16257,將缝紉機速度設定為2000[spm] ’之後前進至步驟S16261;否則若Mn+1-Mn不為3的話,則 前進至下一個步驟S16258。 於步驟S16258中,檢查Mn+1-Mn是否為4,若其為4的 話,則前進至步驟S16259,將縫紉機速度設定為3000[spm] ,之後前進至步驟S16261;否則若Mn+I-Mn不為4的話,則 在下一個步驟S16260中,將縫紉機速度設定為4〇〇〇[Spm] ,之後前進至下一個步驟S16261。 由於縫紉機之速度可藉由上述步驟S16251至16260中 的控制,根據裁布刀的操作間隔(缝線數目)而加以控制, 因此裁布刀於第一次向下移動之後,可破保在下一次向下 移動之前回到上升位置。 而且,於步驟S16261中檢查縫線數目計數是否為Mn- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱後背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝--------訂---------綠 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ΊΤ 五、發明說明(75 )— — — — — — ΊΙΙΙΙΙΙ ^ -ν-l · I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) --line. Order A7 ^ 02649 V. Description of the invention (if it is not Mn-5, go straight ahead Go to step S16261. In step S16252, check the number of downward sutures M of the previous cutter M. The difference between the number of downward sutures Mη + ι of the next cutter Mη + wide is 1 'if it is 1, Then proceed to step S16253, set the sewing machine speed to 400 [spm], and then proceed to step S16261; otherwise, if Μη + ι-Μη is not 1, then proceed to the next step si6254. Is Mn + 1-Mn 2? If it is 2, proceed to step S16255, set the sewing machine speed to 1000 [spm], and then proceed to step S16261; otherwise, if Mn + 1-Mn is not 2 If it is, proceed to the next step S1 6256. In step S162 56, 'check if Mn + 1-Mn is 3, if it is 3', then proceed to step S16257 and set the sewing machine speed to 2000 [spm] ' Proceed to step S16261; otherwise, if Mn + 1-Mn is not 3, proceed to the next step S 16258. In step S16258, check whether Mn + 1-Mn is 4, if it is 4, proceed to step S16259, set the sewing machine speed to 3000 [spm], and then proceed to step S16261; otherwise, if Mn + I If -Mn is not 4, then in the next step S16260, set the sewing machine speed to 4000 [Spm], and then proceed to the next step S16261. Because the speed of the sewing machine can be controlled by the above steps S16251 to 16260 , It is controlled according to the operation interval (number of stitches) of the cloth cutting knife, so after the cloth cutting knife moves down for the first time, it can be broken back to the raised position before the next movement down. Moreover, in step S16261 Check whether the number of stitches is Mn- This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -Order --------- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Green Economy V. Invention Description (75)

R以上,若縫線數目計數為M 跑〇 η以上的話,則在下一個步 驟S16262中’於縫紉機速度 疮 . 中设定—個刀具驅動時間速 度,之後前進至下一個步驟ςΐ6ι7^. 數尤d,驟S16263 m縫線數目計 數不為Mn-R以上的話,則吉垃今、包芯卜 ⑴直接刖進至步驟S16263。刀具 一個速度(包括”停止,’)Above R, if the count of the number of sutures is M or more, then in the next step S16262, set a speed and speed of the cutter in the sewing machine speed, and then proceed to the next step. If the count of the number of sutures in step S16263 is not more than Mn-R, then the gyros and cores are directly advanced to step S16263. Tool one speed (including "stop,")

Si間Ϊ度應該設定成能夠防止當壓布機與縫繼同 移動時,布料因裁布刀向下移動而撕裂或移動之可能The interval between Si should be set to prevent the cloth from tearing or moving due to the downward movement of the cloth cutter when the cloth press moves with the sewing machine.

—· Affi Irk 也 / ,士 ··、 V 於步驟S16263中,檢查縫線數目計數是否為Mn,若 縫線數目計數机的話,則前進至下-個步驟S16264; 否則若縫線數目計數不為Mn的話,則直接前進至上述第73 圖之流程圖中的步驟Si 63。 再者,於步驟S16264中,裁布刀被降下,在下一個步 驟816265中將n增加!,之後前進至上述第73圖之流程圖 中的步驟S163。 現在,第77囷繪示了刀具驅動程序(步驟S1 62 5)中, 裁布刀向下移動(步驟S16264)的一個子程序,於此子程序 中首先在步驟S162641中,根據已知的一個縫線數目計 數,發出一個裁布刀向下移動輸出信號至裁布刀下行氣缸 驅動電路123,而使裁布刀下行氣缸3〇能夠驅使裁布刀“ 向下移動。 接著,於步驟S162642中’有一個對應於裁布刀16向 T移動所需時間之計數值被輸出至裁布刀計數器107,而 在下一個步驟S162643中,裁布刀計數器106啟動。 而且’在下一個步驟S 1 62644中,將裁布刀向下旗標 本紙張尺度適用中規格(21G X 297公釐) '/8 - A7— · Affi Irk also /, taxi ... In step S16263, check whether the number of stitches is Mn. If the number of stitches is counted, go to the next step S16264; otherwise, if the number of stitches is not counted If it is Mn, it proceeds directly to step Si 63 in the flowchart of FIG. 73 described above. Furthermore, in step S16264, the cloth cutting knife is lowered, and n is increased in the next step 816265! Then, proceed to step S163 in the flowchart of FIG. 73 described above. Now, the 77th drawing shows a subroutine of the cutter driver (step S1 62 5), the cutting knife moves downward (step S16264). In this subroutine, first in step S162641, according to a known The number of stitches is counted, and a cutting knife downward output signal is sent to the cutting knife down cylinder driving circuit 123, so that the cutting knife down cylinder 30 can drive the cutting knife "downward." Then, in step S162642 'A count value corresponding to the time required for the cutting knife 16 to move to T is output to the cutting knife counter 107, and in the next step S162643, the cutting knife counter 106 is started. And' In the next step S 1 62644 , Cut the knife down to the paper size of the specimen. Medium size (21G X 297mm) '/ 8-A7

402649 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 設定為1 ’之後前進至上述第76圖之流程圖中的步驟 S16265 ° 接著帛78圖緣示了進給參考中斷程序(步驟的 個子程序,於此子程序中,首先在步驟設定Y 進給脈衝馬達20之旋轉方向,之後在下-個步驟S1642中 ,設定Y進給脈衝馬達2〇之脈衝數目。 接著,在步驟S1643中設定基線進給脈衝馬達4〇之旋 轉方向,之後在下一個步驟31644中,設定基線進給脈衝 馬達40之脈衝數目。 之後,在下一個步驟31645中設定縫針擺動進給脈衝 馬達41之旋轉方向,之後在下一個步驟81646中,設定縫 針擺動進給脈衝馬達41之脈衝數目。 而且,在下一個步驟S1647中,設定供將變動性地控 制拉力組塊19之張力的音頻線圈馬達(上方縫線張力VCM) 之電流及疋值,之後在下一個步驟si648中,將重複數目 增加1。 之後,在下一個步驟S1649中,檢查重複數目是否為〇 ,右重複數目為0的話,則在下一個步驟S1700中,將資 料指標增加1 ’接著在下一個步驟S1701中,設定有關資 料指標之重複數目,之後前進至上述第73圖之流程圖中的 步驟S165 » 順便提一下’於上述之步驟S1649中,若重複數目不 為0的話’則直接前進至上述之步驟Sl65。 接著’第79圖綠示了裁布刀計數器中斷處理(步驟S165) 本紙張尺度遇用中國國家標準(CNS.)A4規格(210 X 297公楚) ΊΨ ·1 -Γ Μ--------訂-------^!鱗 <請先閱靖背面之注意事項再填窝本頁) 402649 A7 B7 77 五、發明說明( 的個子程序,於此子程序中,首先在步驟S165〗中檢查 裁布刀計數器106之計數是否為〇,若計數為〇的話則直 接回到上述第73圖之流程圖中的步驟S158;否則若計數 不為〇的話,則在下一個步驟31625中,將計數減少 之後,在下一個步驟Sl653中,再次檢查計數是否為〇 ,若計數為〇的話,,則在下一個步驟S1654中執行刀具 驅動檢測;否則若計數不為〇的話,則直接回到上述之步 驟 S158。 當刀具驅動檢測完成之後,在下一個步驟S1655中, 檢查布料裁剪向下旗標是否為2,若向下旗標為2的話則 前進至步驟S1656;否則若向下旗標不為2的話,則前進 至步驟S1658。 也就是說,在步驟81656中,裁布刀計數器1〇6被停止 ,接著在步驟S1657中將裁布刀向下旗標設定為〇,而之 後回到第73圖之流程圖中的步驟S158。 此外,於步驟S1658中發出一個裁布刀向上輸出信號 給裁布刀下行氣缸驅動電路123,於是裁布刀下行氣缸3〇 驅使裁布刀16向上移動。 之後,在下一個步驟31659中,裁布刀計數器1〇6被停 止,而在下一個步驟8166〇中,有一個與裁布刀Μ向上移 動所需時間對應的計數值被輸出至裁布刀計數器1〇6。 而且,在下一個步驟81661中,裁布刀計數器1〇6被啟 動,接著在下一個步驟S1662中,將裁布刀向下旗標設定 為2,之後回到第73圖之流程圊中的步驟S158。 本纸張尺朗+國國家標準(CNS)A4 _規格(210 x 297公爱) — I— — — IJIIIIIK. V - I I (請先閲謓背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂_ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 402649402649 The employee's consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs prints the setting to 1 'and then proceeds to step S16265 in the flowchart of the above figure 76. Then the figure 78 shows the feed reference interruption procedure (a subroutine of the steps, here In the subroutine, first set the rotation direction of the Y feed pulse motor 20 in step, and then in the next step S1642, set the number of pulses of the Y feed pulse motor 20. Next, set the baseline feed pulse motor in step S1643. The rotation direction of 40 is set in the next step 31644, and then the pulse number of the baseline feed pulse motor 40 is set. After that, the rotation direction of the needle swing feed pulse motor 41 is set in the next step 31645, and then in the next step 81646, Set the number of pulses of the needle swing feed pulse motor 41. In the next step S1647, set the current and threshold value of the audio coil motor (upper thread tension VCM) for variably controlling the tension of the tension block 19, Then in the next step si648, the number of repetitions is increased by 1. Then, in the next step S1649, the repetitions are checked If the item is 0 and the number of right repetitions is 0, then in the next step S1700, the data index is increased by 1 '. Then in the next step S1701, the number of repetitions of the data index is set, and then proceed to the flowchart of FIG. 73 above. Step S165 in the »» By the way, in the above step S1649, if the number of repetitions is not 0, proceed directly to the above step S65. Then "Figure 79 shows the interruption processing of the cloth knife counter (step S165) ) This paper size meets the Chinese National Standard (CNS.) A4 specification (210 X 297 cm)) · 1 -Γ Μ -------- Order ------- ^! Scale < Please First read the precautions on the back of Jing and then fill in this page) 402649 A7 B7 77 V. Description of the subroutine (in this subroutine, first check in step S165) whether the count of the cloth cutter counter 106 is 0, If the count is 0, return directly to step S158 in the flowchart of FIG. 73; otherwise, if the count is not 0, then in the next step 31625, after the count is reduced, in the next step S6535, check the count again. Whether it is 〇, if If the number is 0, the tool drive detection is performed in the next step S1654; otherwise, if the count is not 0, the process returns directly to the above step S158. After the tool drive detection is completed, in the next step S1655, check the fabric cutting Whether the down flag is 2; if the down flag is 2, proceed to step S1656; otherwise, if the down flag is not 2, proceed to step S1658. That is, in step 81656, the cloth is cut. The knife counter 106 is stopped, then the cloth cutting knife down flag is set to 0 in step S1657, and then it returns to step S158 in the flowchart of FIG. 73. In addition, in step S1658, a cutting knife upward output signal is sent to the cutting knife down cylinder driving circuit 123, so the cutting knife down cylinder 30 drives the cutting knife 16 to move upward. Thereafter, in the next step 31659, the cutter counter 106 is stopped, and in the next step 8166〇, a count value corresponding to the time required for the cutter M to move upward is output to the cutter counter 1 〇6. Moreover, in the next step 81661, the cloth cutter counter 106 is started, and then in the next step S1662, the cloth cutter down flag is set to 2, and then the process returns to step S158 in the process of FIG. 73. . This paper rule + National Standard (CNS) A4 _ Specifications (210 x 297 public love) — I — — — IJIIIIIK. V-II (Please read the notes on the back of the page before filling this page) Order _ Ministry of Economy Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative 402649

五、發明說明(78 ) 接著,第80圖繪示了刀具驅動 的一個早鉬&Λ + 1 饿列程序(步驟S1654) J 個子程序,於此子程序中,昔止+ (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 杏县π 士·开*在步驟S16541中檢 查是否有-個裁布刀向下移動信號正被輸出… 軋缸驅動電路123,若信號正 ,卜仃 的話,則前進至下一 個步驟S16542;否則若信號未正在 步驟⑽❿ 在輸出H則前進至 於步驟S16542中,檢查刀具向’ J r微測開關34b是否啟 動’若開關啟動的話’則回到上述第79圖之流程圖中的步 驟咖;否則若開關未啟動的話,則前進至步驟_4 〇 此外,於步驟816543中,檢查刀具向下檢測開關3仆 是否關閉,若開關關閉的話,則回到上述第79圖之流程圖 中的步驟S1675 ;否則若開關未關閉的話,則前進至步驟 S16544 〇 而且’在步驟S16544中,檢查是否有一個刀具驅動錯 誤仏號輸出’接著在下一個步驟S1 6545中發出縫匆機停 止輸出信號,而之後回到上述之步驟S16*75。因此,當刀 具驅動錯誤產生時,缝紉機被迫於缝針上方位置處停止。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 在具有本發明實施例之上述控制系統的一部紐孔織補 缝紉機中,下文將敘述使用第54圖中繪示之(1)至(9)縫合 次序(資料點)範圍的鈕孔縫合程序。也就是說,當操作者 於控制面板110上設定所需數值時,縫紉機於步驟S6中由 缝合起始程序移動,而位於一縫合起始位置、亦即第54圖 中繪示的一個點Pi處,而壓布機15則下降。若啟動開關由 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A7 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明( 操作者控制的話,則步驟S15之缝合程序將被啟動。 根據此縫合子程序,與資料點(2)對應之左侧縫合(左 侧平行部分)開始,各脈衝馬達根據由進給參考點在TG中 斷處理S160設定之時間點作中斷處理S164所完成之各脈 衝設定而運轉,當判定進給參考中斷處理之重複次數為〇 時(步称S1649) ’亦即當縫線數目(缝線之數量)達到一特 定值時’資料點被設定在(3)(步驟sl7〇〇);而且同樣地, 縫線根據TG中斷處理和進給中斷處理而形成。之後同樣 地,資料點(4)及(5)完成,藉以形成第一密線部分。 於資料點(6)中’亦即在右側縫合(右側平行部分)期間 ,於縫針上方位置中斷處理(步驟S161)之刀具驅動處理子 程序中,當計數值達到根據縫線數目計數所作之控制設定 值Mn時,裁布刀16根據裁布刀向下子程序之處理而向下 移動。在往後的時間當中,有數條縫線於裁布刀16下降之 前或當裁布刀16下降時,根據步驟816261之尺的設定值( 預先設定),縫紉機速度降低至上述的刀具傳動速度。而 且’此程序被重複許多次’其次數與利用上述方式(S16265) 算出的數值η相當。此外,裁布刀向下移動之重複間隔被 判定出,並根據判定結果設定縫紉機迷度(步驟S16251至 S16260) 〇 於資料點上(9)之缝針上方位置中斷處理中,在點p9 處’亦即在缝合起始位置P1處,若剩下的縫線數目為〇, 亦即若紐孔織補完成’則發出縫紉機停止信號,藉由傳統 已知的固定位置停止裝置使縫紉機於縫針上方位置處停止 ------------t- -------l· -------^ (請先閱说背面之:注意事項再填寫本頁)V. Description of the Invention (78) Next, Fig. 80 shows an early molybdenum & Λ + 1 sequence program (step S1654) driven by the cutter. In this subroutine, the past + + (please read first Note on the back, please fill in this page again.) Xingxian π · Open * In step S16541, check if a cutting knife moving signal is being output ... Rolling cylinder driving circuit 123, if the signal is positive, 仃, Then proceed to the next step S16542; otherwise, if the signal is not in step ⑽❿ at output H, proceed to step S16542, check whether the tool is turned to 'J r micro-test switch 34b is activated' and if the switch is activated, return to the above-mentioned figure 79 Step C in the flow chart; otherwise, if the switch is not activated, proceed to step _4 〇 In addition, in step 816543, check whether the tool downward detection switch 3 is turned off, if the switch is off, return to the above Step S1675 in the flowchart of Figure 79; otherwise, if the switch is not turned off, proceed to step S16544 〇 and 'In step S16544, check whether there is a tool drive error 仏 output' and then continue to the next Step S1 6545 issued hasty sewing machine stop in the output signal, and then returns to the above step S16 * 75. Therefore, when a tool driving error occurs, the sewing machine is forced to stop at a position above the needle. The Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs printed on a buttonhole darning sewing machine with the above-mentioned control system of the embodiment of the present invention. The following will describe the use of (1) to (9) stitching sequence shown in Figure 54 ( Data points) range of buttonhole suture procedures. That is, when the operator sets a desired value on the control panel 110, the sewing machine is moved by the sewing start program in step S6, and is located at a sewing start position, that is, a point Pi shown in FIG. 54 While the cloth press 15 is lowered. If the start switch is printed by this paper size to Chinese National Standards (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) A7 A7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy V. Invention Description (If controlled by the operator, then the stitching procedure of step S15 According to this stitching subroutine, the left stitching (parallel part on the left side) corresponding to the data point (2) starts, and each pulse motor performs interrupt processing according to the time point set by the TG interrupt processing S160 from the feed reference point Each pulse set completed in S164 runs. When it is determined that the number of repetitions of the feed reference interrupt processing is 0 (step S1649), that is, when the number of sutures (the number of sutures) reaches a specific value, the data points are It is set at (3) (step sl700); and similarly, the suture is formed according to the TG interrupt processing and the feed interrupt processing. After that, the data points (4) and (5) are completed to form the first dense In the data point (6), that is, during the stitching on the right side (parallel part on the right side), the tool driving processing subroutine that interrupts the processing (step S161) at the position above the needle, when counting When the value reaches the control setting value Mn based on the number of stitches, the cutting knife 16 moves downward according to the processing of the cutting subroutine by the cutting knife. In the following time, several stitches descend on the cutting knife 16 Before or when the cloth cutting knife 16 is lowered, the sewing machine speed is reduced to the above-mentioned tool transmission speed according to the set value (pre-set) of the ruler of step 816261. Moreover, 'this procedure is repeated many times', and the number of times and using the above method (S16265 ) The calculated value η is equivalent. In addition, the repeating interval of the downward movement of the cloth cutter is determined, and the sewing machine fan degree is set according to the determination result (steps S16251 to S16260). ○ The position above the needle on the data point (9) is interrupted. In the process, at the point p9 'that is, at the sewing start position P1, if the number of remaining sutures is 0, that is, if the buttonhole darning is completed', a sewing machine stop signal is issued, and the conventionally known fixed position is used. Stop device stops the sewing machine at the position above the needle ------------ t- ------- l · ------- ^ (Please read the back first: note (Fill in this page again)

402649 A7 ------ B7 五、發明說明(80 ) 現在,第89圖繪示了左旋圓案程序(步驟S38)的一個 子程序,於此子程序中,首先在步驟S38i中算出一個縫 合起始位置,在下—個步驟謂2中,算出右側平行部分 ,而在下一個步驟S383中算出第一密線部分。 而且,在下一個步驟S384中算出左側平行部分,在下 一個步驟S385中算出第二較縫線部分,在下一個步驟 S386中算出縫合末端,之後前進至上述第9〇圖之流程圖 中所示的步驟S36。 .接=,下文中將詳述上述之左旋圖案程序(步驟S38) ,尤其是,依序敘述縫合起始位置程序(步驟S38i)、右侧 平行部分程序(步驟S382)、第一密線部分程序(步驟“Μ) 、左侧平行部分程序(步驟S384)、第二密線部分程序(步 驟S385)、以及縫合末端程序。 於此,在敘述各運作程序之前,將先敘述縫合次序及 條件。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 第90圖繪示了縫合次序:尤其是,第9〇⑴圖繪示了縫 紉機從機器原點移動至縫合起始位置;第9〇(2)圖繪示了 繼第90(1)圖之後的右侧平行部分縫合;第9〇(3)圖繪示了 向上縫合第一密線部分至其中間部分;第9〇(4)圖繪=了 第一密線部分之縫合末端;第9〇(5)圖繪示了左側平行部 分縫合開始;第90(6)圖繪示了左側平行部分之缝合;第 9〇(7)圖繪示了第二密線部分之縫合開始;帛9〇⑻:繪示 了向上縫合第二密線部分至其中間部分;MW)圖緣402649 A7 ------ B7 V. Description of the Invention (80) Now, Figure 89 shows a subroutine of the left-handed circle program (step S38). In this subroutine, first calculate a step in step S38i At the stitching start position, in the next step, step 2, the right parallel portion is calculated, and in the next step S383, the first dense line portion is calculated. Then, the left parallel portion is calculated in the next step S384, the second relatively suture portion is calculated in the next step S385, the suture end is calculated in the next step S386, and then the process proceeds to the step shown in the flowchart of FIG. 9 above. S36. . 接 =, the above-mentioned left-handed pattern program (step S38) will be described in detail, in particular, the suture start position program (step S38i), the right parallel part program (step S382), and the first dense line section will be described in order. Program (step "M), left parallel part program (step S384), second dense line part program (step S385), and suture end program. Here, before describing each operation program, the stitching sequence and conditions will be described first. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Figure 90 shows the sewing sequence: In particular, Figure 90⑴ shows the sewing machine moving from the machine origin to the starting position of stitching; Figure 90 (2) Figure 90 (1) shows the right parallel part of the suture; Figure 90 (3) shows the first dense line to the middle part; Figure 90 (4) shows the The suture end of the first dense line part; Fig. 90 (5) shows the start of suture of the left parallel part; Fig. 90 (6) shows the suture of the left parallel part; Fig. 90 (7) shows Sewing of the second dense line part is started; 帛 90⑻: shows that the second dense line is stitched upward To an intermediate portion; MW) FIG edge

本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS〉A4規格(210 X 297公U A7 402649 B7____ 五、發明說明(81 ) 示了縫合末端(第二密線部分之縫合結束)。順便提一下, 縫紉機移動至機器原點僅於當縫紉機被切換至縫合模式時 完成。 再者,於第92圊中繪示了左旋圖案程序的另—項實施 例,其說明了縫針擺動機構42於左旋及右手圖案操作中的 運作。尤其是,如第92(a)及(b)圖中所示,當縫針9之擺動 基線擺向第92(a)圖之左側(第92(a)圖中的一個虛線部分 43R)時,基線手臂43移動至基線右侧,原點位置(以實線 表示)則位於刀具槽1 5b位置(縫針針眼15a之中心)中作為 其參考點;而當缝針9之擺動基線擺向第92(a)圖之右側( 第92(a)圖中的一個虚線部分43L)時,基線手臂43移動至 基線右左側。 此外’如第93(a)、93(b)及93(c)圖中所示,當基線槓 桿44以縫針擺動量零點位置之原點位置為其參考點而擺向 第93圖之左側(第93(a)圖中的一個虛線部分44R)時,縫針 9之縫針擺動量以基線為其參考點而朝右側方向增加;而 當基線槓桿44擺向第93圖之右側(第93(a)圖中的一個虛線 部分44L)時’縫針9之縫針擺動量以基線為其參考點而朝 左側方向增加。於第5 5圖繪示之表格中,當基線κ,、---K9 上之資料與Η〗、---Η9上之資料分別被指定為負號、亦即 符號相反時’則可得到如第9 1圖之表格中所敘述的資料, 於是該程序是以左旋方式完成。於第91圖中,表重複 次數(縫線數目)、Y為γ進給、K為基線、Η為擺動寬度、 而Τ為縫線張力值,其等分別對應於第9〇圖中所示之縫線 本紙張尺度適用中國國豕標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公髮) --— — ΙΊΙΙ — ll· Γ· ----!| 訂---------K - (請先閱謓背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 ~~----------- 五、發明說明() 次序(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)(9)。 <控制系統之修正> 接著,下文中將敘述第81圖,圖中繪示了藉由部分改 變前述第37圖中繪示之通用流程圖而得到的一個修正過通 用流程圖。 ’ 於第81圖中繪示之通用流程圖中,步驟S1〜si4與第π 圏中繪示之通用流程圖相同。因此從現在開始,將敘述新 的步驟S21至S24’而非上述步驟S15至S16。 順便提一下,第82圖繪示了用於鈕孔織補運作所之諸 項條件,不僅包括了第40圖中繪示之條件,亦即裁布刀長 度a、刀具寬度b、密線長度(;、密線寬度d、平行部分節距 e、密線部分節距f、刀具·第一密線間隙g、刀具第二密 線間隙h,而且包括了刀具尺寸Li、從縫合起始位置到第 一刀具末端位置(y進給馬達脈衝數目)的布料移動量Ζα 以及從第一刀具末端位置到第二刀具末端位置以進給馬達 脈衝數目)的布料移動量Ζ/3。裁布刀15之向下移動時間係 根據對應於布料移動量Ζα之y進給脈衝馬達數目的加去 值(絕對值)而決定的。 ' 於此,在第82圖中,對於一中間刀具裁剪程序而言, 其向下時間係根據右侧縫合期間的脈衝數目之加法值(絕 對值)而決定的;而且對於第82圖中繪示的一個預縫裁剪 程序及後縫裁剪程序而言,其向下時間係根據從縫合起始 位置之脈衝數目的加法值(絕對值)而決定的。然而,與刀 具尺寸L對應之脈衝數目可根據一條方程式Lp (1個脈 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) «5. II----- 装!---—訂-11! — 1綠 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 «2649 A7 B7 五、發明說明(83 ) 之進給長度)得到,亦即將除以丨個脈衝之進給長度。 如第81圖中所示,於上述之步驟S14之後,在步驟s2i 中,縫合起始移動被呼叫,而γ進給脈衝馬達2〇、基線進 給脈衝馬達4 0以及縫針擺動進給脈衝馬達4 i分別被驅動至 縫合起始位置。之後在下一個步驟S22中,縫合程序被呼 叫’而使缝合程序開始。 當縫合程序完成之後,在下一個步驟S23中,於縫針 右側位置移動被執行之後,在下一個步驟S24中執行壓 布機15上升輪出,之後回到上述之步驟“,因此在本實 施例中,當一特定的鈕孔織補或縫合程序完成時,縫針擺 向右方而超過裁布刀,藉以在其上方位置處停止,而當下 一個鈕孔織補程序開始時,縫針於開始進行側邊縫合程序 之前會移動至其縫合起始位置處。 接著,下文中將敘述於上述步驟S22中所執行之縫合 程序。 第83圖繪示了縫合程序(步驟S22)的一個子程序,於 此子程序中,首先於步驟S22i中檢查刀具裁剪是否為— 項預缝裁剪程序,若其為預縫裁剪程序的話,則在步驟 S222中執行一項縫合程序(1),之後前進至上述通用流程 圊(第81圈)中的步驟S23;否則若其非預縫裁剪程序的話 ,則前進至下一個步驟S223。 於步驟S223中,檢查刀具裁剪程序是否為互縫裁剪程 序’若其為互缝裁剪程序的話,則在步驟S224中執行一 項縫合程序(2)’之後前進至上述步驟S23 ;否則若其非互 ------Jli — -iw t -----it--1111 111^ (請先閱洗背面之>r意事項再填寫本頁)This paper size applies the Chinese national standard (CNS> A4 specification (210 X 297 male U A7 402649 B7____ V. The description of the invention (81) shows the end of the suture of the second dense line). By the way, the sewing machine moves to The machine origin is completed only when the sewing machine is switched to the stitching mode. Furthermore, another example of the left-handed pattern program is shown in Section 92, which illustrates the operation of the needle swing mechanism 42 in the left-handed and right-handed patterns. In particular, as shown in Figures 92 (a) and (b), when the swing baseline of the needle 9 is swung to the left of Figure 92 (a) (a dotted line 43R in Figure 92 (a)) ), The baseline arm 43 moves to the right of the baseline, and the origin position (indicated by a solid line) is located in the tool slot 15b (the center of the needle eye 15a) as its reference point; When moving to the right of Figure 92 (a) (a dashed line 43L in Figure 92 (a)), the baseline arm 43 moves to the left and right of the baseline. In addition, 'As shown in Figures 93 (a), 93 (b), and 93 (c) As shown in the figure, when the baseline lever 44 uses the zero position of the needle swing When the reference point is swung to the left of Figure 93 (a dashed portion 44R in Figure 93 (a)), the stitch swing of the needle 9 increases toward the right with the baseline as its reference point; and when the baseline lever 44 swings To the right of Fig. 93 (a dashed portion 44L in Fig. 93 (a)), the amount of needle swing of the "needle 9" increases toward the left with the baseline as its reference point. In the table shown in Fig. 5 and 5 When the data on the baseline κ ,, --- K9 and Η, and the data on --- Η9 are respectively designated as negative signs, that is, the signs are opposite, then it can be obtained as described in the table in Figure 91. The program is completed in a left-handed manner. In Figure 91, the table repeats (the number of sutures), Y is the γ feed, K is the baseline, Η is the swing width, and T is the suture tension value. These respectively correspond to the paper size of the suture shown in Figure 90, which is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × 297). ----ΙΊΙΙ — ll · Γ · ---- ! | Order --------- K-(Please read the notes on the back of 謓 before filling out this page) Printed Economy Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative A7 ~~ ------------ V. Description of Invention () Order (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7 ) (8) (9). ≪ Modification of the control system > Next, Figure 81 will be described below, which shows one obtained by partially changing the general flowchart shown in Figure 37 above. The general flowchart has been modified. 'In the general flowchart shown in FIG. 81, steps S1 to si4 are the same as the general flowchart shown in π 圏. Therefore, from now on, new steps S21 to S24 'will be described instead of the above steps S15 to S16. Incidentally, Fig. 82 shows the conditions used in the buttonhole darning operation, not only including the conditions shown in Fig. 40, that is, the cutter length a, cutter width b, and dense line length ( ;, Dense line width d, parallel part pitch e, dense line part pitch f, cutter · first dense line gap g, cutter second dense line gap h, and including the cutter size Li, from the stitching start position to The cloth moving amount Zα at the first tool end position (the number of y feed motor pulses) and the cloth moving amount Z / 3 from the first tool end position to the second tool end position with the number of feed motor pulses). The downward movement time of the cutting blade 15 is determined based on the addition value (absolute value) of the number of y feed pulse motors corresponding to the cloth movement amount Zα. 'Here, in Fig. 82, for an intermediate cutter cutting program, the downward time is determined according to the addition value (absolute value) of the number of pulses during the right stitching; For a pre-sewing cutting program and a post-sewing cutting program shown, the downward time is determined according to the addition value (absolute value) of the number of pulses from the starting position of the stitching. However, the number of pulses corresponding to the tool size L can be based on an equation Lp (1 pulse paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) «5. II ----- installed!- --- Order-11! — 1 green (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page} Printed by «2649 A7 B7 printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Feed length of the invention description (83)) , Which is also divided by the feed length of 丨 pulses. As shown in Figure 81, after the above step S14, in step s2i, the stitching start movement is called, and the γ feed pulse motor 20, the baseline The feed pulse motor 40 and the needle swing feed pulse motor 4 i are respectively driven to the stitching starting position. Then, in the next step S22, the stitching procedure is called to start the stitching procedure. After the stitching procedure is completed, in the next step In step S23, after the movement of the right position of the stitch is performed, the next step S24 is performed to lift the cloth presser 15 out, and then return to the above step ". Therefore, in this embodiment, when a specific buttonhole darn or Suture When the sequence is completed, the needle swings to the right and exceeds the cloth cutter to stop at the upper position. When the next buttonhole darning program starts, the needle moves to its starting position before starting the side stitching procedure. Next, the stitching procedure performed in the above step S22 will be described below. Fig. 83 shows a subroutine of the stitching procedure (step S22). In this subroutine, the cutter cutting is first checked in step S22i. Whether it is an item of pre-stitch cutting procedure, if it is a pre-stitch cutting procedure, execute a stitching procedure (1) in step S222, and then proceed to step S23 in the above-mentioned general process 圊 (circle 81); otherwise If it is not a pre-sewing cutting program, proceed to the next step S223. In step S223, check whether the tool cutting program is an inter-sewing cutting program. If it is an inter-sewing cutting program, execute an item in step S224 After the stitching procedure (2) ', proceed to the above step S23; otherwise, if it is not mutually ------ Jli--iw t ----- it--1111 111 ^ (Please read the back of the wash first> r (Please fill in this page if you have any questions)

A7 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 _B7______ 五、發明說明(84 ) 縫裁剪程序的話,則在下一個步驟S225中執行一項縫合 程序(3),之後前進至上述步驟S23。 參看對應於上述各縫合程序之刀具驅動時間的程序, 當選擇預縫及後縫裁剪程序的其中一項時,可算出γ進給 脈衝馬達20之移動量;而當選擇互縫裁剪程序時,可算出 縫線數目。 接著,下文將分別敘述上述步驟S222中用於預縫裁剪 程序之縫合程序(1),上述步驟S224中用於互縫裁剪程序 之縫合程序(2)、以及上述步驟S225中用於後縫裁前程序 之縫合程序(3)。 於此’其中布料於紐孔織補運作期間利用互缝裁煎程 序裁剪之縫合程序(2)(步驟S224)係與上述第37圖之通用 流程圖中的縫合程序(步驟S15)相同,亦即縫合程序(2)之 内容與第73圖繪示之流程圖中敘述者相同。然而,對於互 縫裁剪而言,如上所述,向下移動時間係根據於第82圖中 的右側縫合程序期間之脈衝數目的加法值(絕對值)而決定 的。 因此,在下列敛述中將僅敘述於紐孔織補程序開始之 前利用預縫裁剪程序裁剪布料的縫合程序(1)(步驟S222) ’以及當紐孔織補程序完成之後利用後縫裁剪程序裁剪布 料的縫合程序(3)(步驟S225)。 現在’第84圖繪示了利用預縫裁剪程序進行縫合程序 U)(步驟S222)的一個子程序,於此子程序中,首先在步 称S2221中將γ進給脈衝馬達2〇向上驅動至刀具傳動位置 本紙張尺度適用準(CNS)A4_規格(210 X 297公釐)------— f ----^----^---------0 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(85 ) 處,而在下—個步驟S2222中將裁布刀15向下驅動。 而且,在下一個步驟S2223中,縫合開始移動程序被 呼叫,藉以將Y進給脈衝馬達2〇、基線進給脈衝馬達4〇以 及縫針擺動進給脈衝馬達41驅動至縫合開始位置處。之後 ,在下一個步驟S2224中呼叫縫合程序,而使縫合程序開 始進行。 也就是說’於縫合程序期間,並不執行刀具驅動程序 〇 順便提一下,當縫合程序完成之後,則前進至上述第 81圖之流程圖中的步驟S23。 ’也就是說’在預縫裁剪程序的情況中,如上所述, 其向下移動時間係根據從第82圖中繪示之縫合起始位置的 脈衝數目之加法值(絕對值)而決定的。 現在,第85圖繪示了利用後缝裁剪進行縫合程序(3)( 步驟S22 5)的一個子程序,於此子程序中,首先在步驟s 中呼叫縫合程序,藉以啟動縫合程序。 而且,當縫合程序完成之後’在下一個步驟S2 2 52中 ,Y進給脈衝馬達2〇被向上驅動至刀具傳動位置,而在下 一個步驟S2253中,驅動裁布刀15向下移動。 再者’於下一個步驟S2254中呼叫縫合開始移動程序 ’藉以將Y進給脈衝馬達20、基線進給脈衝馬達4〇以及縫 針擺動進給脈衝馬達4丨驅動至縫合開始位置處,之後前進 至上述第81圖之流程圖中的步驟S2 3。 在後縫裁剪程序的情況中也一樣,其向下移動時間係 — — — — — 1 — — — — — ^ — — — — — — — ^-1111111 ^ (請先閱諫背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)A7 A7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs _B7______ V. Description of the Invention (84) If the seam cutting process is performed, a seaming process (3) is performed in the next step S225, and then the process proceeds to step S23. Referring to the program corresponding to the cutter driving time of each of the above stitching programs, when one of the pre-sewing and back-sewing cutting programs is selected, the movement amount of the γ feed pulse motor 20 can be calculated; and when the inter-sewing cutting program is selected, Can calculate the number of sutures. Next, the stitching procedure (1) for the pre-sewing cutting procedure in step S222, the stitching procedure (2) for the inter-sewing cutting procedure in step S224, and the post-sewing in step S225 will be described separately below. The suture procedure of the previous procedure (3). Herein, the stitching procedure (2) (step S224) where the fabric is cut using the cross-cutting frying procedure during the buttonhole darning operation is the same as the stitching procedure (step S15) in the general flowchart of FIG. 37 above, that is, The contents of the suture procedure (2) are the same as those described in the flowchart shown in FIG. 73. However, for mutual stitching, as described above, the downward movement time is determined based on the addition value (absolute value) of the number of pulses during the right stitching procedure in Fig. 82. Therefore, in the following summary, only the stitching procedure (1) (Step S222) using the pre-sewing trimming procedure to cut the fabric before the buttonhole darning procedure is started and the post-sewing trimming procedure to cut the fabric after the buttonhole darning procedure is completed will be described. (3) (step S225). Now, Fig. 84 shows a subroutine of the stitching procedure U) (step S222) using the pre-stitching cutting procedure. In this subroutine, first, the gamma feed pulse motor 20 is driven upward in step S2221 to Tool transmission position The paper size is applicable to the standard (CNS) A4_ (210 X 297 mm) ------------ f ---- ^ ---- ^ --------- 0 ( Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (5) Invention Description (85), and in the next step S2222, the cloth cutter 15 is driven downward. Further, in the next step S2223, the sewing start movement program is called, whereby the Y feed pulse motor 20, the baseline feed pulse motor 40, and the needle swing feed pulse motor 41 are driven to the sewing start position. Thereafter, the stitching procedure is called in the next step S2224, and the stitching procedure starts. That is, 'the cutter driver is not executed during the stitching procedure. By the way, when the stitching procedure is completed, it proceeds to step S23 in the flowchart of FIG. 81 described above. 'That is to say' In the case of the pre-stitch cutting procedure, as described above, its downward movement time is determined based on the addition value (absolute value) of the number of pulses from the stitching start position shown in Fig. 82 . Now, Fig. 85 shows a subroutine of the stitching procedure (3) (step S22-5) using back stitch cutting. In this subroutine, the stitching procedure is first called in step s to start the stitching procedure. Further, when the stitching procedure is completed ', in the next step S2 2 52, the Y feed pulse motor 20 is driven upward to the cutter driving position, and in the next step S2253, the cloth cutting blade 15 is driven to move downward. Furthermore, 'the stitching start movement program is called in the next step S2254', so that the Y feed pulse motor 20, the baseline feed pulse motor 40, and the needle swing feed pulse motor 4 are driven to the stitching start position, and then proceed to Step S23 in the flowchart of FIG. 81 described above. The same is true in the case of the back-sewing cutting program, and its downward movement time is — — — — — 1 — — — — — ^ — — — — — — ^ -1111111 ^ (Please read the precautions on the back of the screen before (Fill in this page)

餒濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 ________B7__ 五、發明說明(86 ) 根據從第82圓中縿示之縫合起始位置的脈衝數目之加法值 (絕對值)而決定的。 於此’第86圖緣不了前刀具裁剪程序後縫裁剪程序 、以及互縫裁剪程序之間的—個差異。首先,如第86(a) 圖中所不,預縫裁剪程序係一項於縫合鈕孔織補縫線之前 將刀具下降而預先開啟一個鈕孔的程序。 而且,如第86(b)圖中所示,後缝裁剪程序係一項於 鈕孔織補縫線縫合完成之後將刀具下降而開啟一個鈕孔的 裁剪程序。 而且,如第86(c)圖中所示,互縫裁剪程序係一項於 缝合鈕孔織補縫線時將刀具下降而開啟一個鈕孔的裁剪程 序。 接著,第87圖繪示了鈕孔織補縫線在預縫裁剪情況中 的狀態。舉例來說,首先如第87(a)圖中所示,當上下方 布料以預縫裁剪程序進行裁剪而開啟一個鈕孔H時如第 87(b)圖中所示,於縫合程序期間,有一條上方縫線穿過 的縫針9穿過鈕孔η而將上下方縫線連在一起,藉以進行 抽絲飾縫。 而且,如第87(c)圖中所示,當具有上述抽絲飾縫之 縫合部分藉由縫針9穿過鈕孔H而完成之後,則鈕孔1}内不 能留有任何線材(編織線)。 另一方面,第88圖繪示了鈕孔缝線於後縫裁剪程序及 互縫裁剪程序時之狀態。 於此’在後縫裁剪程序及互縫裁剪程序中,當鈕孔織 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) I I J — ---I IV— - I I - (請先閱後背面之龙意事項再填寫本頁) 訂· -I線· A7 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(1 補縫線縫好之後,以刀具裁剪布料而形成或開啟钮孔Η, 在此情況中,為了不剪斷缝線,則左右側縫合部分之缝線 之間必須保留一特定間隙。 因此,如第88圖中所示,於鈕孔Η左右側上面,在各 自的側邊縫合部分之缝線之間會剩餘一些布料。 再者,亦可使用另一個圖案操作子程序實施例,其中 於下歹J操作中,使用了以第94圖中繪示之條件為基礎的尺 寸’亦即布料裁剪長度a、左刀具寬度比、右刀具寬度^ 密線長度c、进線寬度d、平行部分節距e、密線部分節 距f、刀具第〜欠預縫間隙g、以及刀具第二次密線間隙g 〇 此外,於第95圖繪示之設定項目表中,第39圖中繪示 之表格中的刀具寬度被分成左側刀具寬度、及右側刀具寬 度,而刀具下降之左右側位置則予以忽略。 現在,第96圖繪示了一個縫合起始位置操作子程序( 步驟S381),於步驟S3811之子程序中,首先算出y〗=c/2, 在下一個步驟S3812中設定Kl=bl,在下一個步驟33813中 算出Hd-O^+bOQ},在下一個步驟S3814中設定丁产縫 合起始張力,之後前進至第89圖中繪示之流程圖的上述步 驟S382。此外,藉由各自指定上述之^及匕,則從刀具下 降點至左右側縫合部分之間隙可以分開調整。 現在,第97圖繪示了右側平行部分操作的一個子程序 (步驟S3 82),於步驟S3 821之子程序中首先設定n — 下一個步驟S3822中,設定ΥΡ0’而在下一個"步驟=8 = | · t裝--------訂--------!線 ^讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} 五、發明說明() ’設定K5 = 〇 °其次’於步驟讀4中,算出H5=(d+bl+b2)/2 之後在下-個步驟83825中,設定&平行部分張力。 t 而且,在下一個步驟“826中,設定Y6=e,而在下一 個步_827中,算出WgHe。之後,在下一個步 驟S3 828中’設疋〖6=〇,在下一個步驟S3829中設定η =〇 ,在下-個步驟S3530中,設定Τ6=平行部分張力,之6後 前進至第89圖中繪示之流程圖的上述步驟S383。 現在’第98圖緣示了第一密線部分操作的一個子程序 (步驟則),於步驟S3831之子程序中,首先設定Υ〆, 在下-個步驟S3832中’算出N〜f,在下一個步㈣M3 中,算出K3={(d+bi+b2)/2};N3,而下一個步驟S則中, 算出 HeKd+bi+b2)/〗}* N3。 之後,在下一個步驟S3835中,設定丁卢密線部分張力 ’在下-個步驟S3836中’設定Y4=f,而在下_個步驟 S3837 中,算出n4=c+ f。 之後,在下一個步驟S3838中,設定1=〇,在下一個 步驟S3839中,設定H3=0’在下一個步驟S384〇中設定丁4=” 密線部分張力,,,之後前進至第89圖中繪示之流程圖的4上 述步驟S3.84。 伯咏部分孫作〜 调卞程 (步驟S385),於步驟S3851之子程序中’首先設定 在下一個步驟S3852中,設定Y7 = 〇,而在下一個步㈣8 中,設定1=0。之後,在下一個步驟幻854中,算 而在下一個步驟幻855中,設定Τ7=,,密 、發明說明() 部分張力”。 此外,在下一個步驟33856中設定Y^f,而在下一 個步驟S3857中,算出Ns = c+ f。之後,在下_個步驟s3858 中,設定Ks=0 ,在下一個步驟S3859 _,設定〇,在下 —個步驟S3860中,設定八=”密線部分張力,,,之後前進至 第89圖中繪示之流程圖的上述步驟S386。 現在,第100圖繪示了縫合端操作的一個子程序(步驟 33 86),於步驟33 861之子程序中,首先設定丫9=卜在下一 個步驟S3862中,算出N9=(c/2)+ f,而在下一個步驟s3863 中,算出N9。 此外,在下一個步驟S3864中,算出H9={d_(bi+b2)/2} + % ’在下一個步驟S3865中,設定T9=”縫合端張力,,在 下一個步驟S3866中,算出總縫線數目=9Ση=2Νη,之後前 進至第49圖中繪示之流程圖的上述步驟836。 其次,第101圖繪示了拉力鉤匹配模式操作的另一個 實施例,在此實施例中,當第47圖中繪示之拉力鉤匹配模 式操作(步驟S114)之步驟S1148完成之後,依序進行缝紉 機主軸角度匹配程序(步驟S1152)、繼電器關閉指令程序( 步驟S1153)、用以判斷設定鍵開啟與否之程序(步驟su54) 、以及用於指令程序之電源供應器(步驟SU55)。 也就是說,在步驟S1148中,擺動寬度脈衝馬達(縫針 擺動速度脈衝馬達)41係由縫針擺動速度脈衝馬達驅動裝 置114加以驅動,在下一個步驟31152中,縫紉機主軸 五 發明說明(90 ) 1吻。而在下-個步称SU53中電源供應器之繼電 被關閉❿有-位操作員進行一項拉力釣匹配程序。 之後在下一個步驟S1154中,檢查設定鍵147是否開 ★若<•又疋鍵147開啟的話,則前進至下一個步驟s 11 55 若叹定鍵147未開啟的話,則再度回到步驟s〗丨54。 此於步驟S1155中,當電源供應器之繼電器被關閉之後 ,前進至通用流程圖(第37圖)中的上述步驟S2。 於第102囷繪示的一個情況中,在步驟以〗“令擺動 寬度脈衝馬達(縫針擺動速度脈衝馬達)4丨係由縫針擺動速 度脈衝馬達驅動裝置114加以驅動,在下一個步驟S11 52中 縫紉機主轴角度得到吻合,在下一個步驟81153中電 源供應器之繼電器被關閉,而有一位操作員進行一項拉力 鉤匹配程序。 現在,第i03圖繪示了Z缝紉機主軸角度匹配程序的一 個子程序(步驟S1152)’於步驟S11521之子程序中,首先 輸出縫紉機啟動信號,檢查縫針上方位置之偵測是否顯示 出縫紉機處於不正常定位,若缝針上方位置之偵測顯示出 不正常定位,則前進至下一個步驟81 1523,否則若縫針 上方位置之偵測未顯示出不正常定位,則再度回到步驟 S11522 。 於步驟S11523中’TG計數設為0,在下—個步驟SU524 中’檢查TG中斷要求是否存在’若TG中斷要求存在的爷 ’則在下一個步驟S1 1525中,TG計數增加1,且之後前進 至下一個步驟S11526,否則若TG中斷要灰尤六各 卞个谇在的話, 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A7 _________B7 91 ---------- 五、發明說明() 則再度回到步驟S11524。 於步驟S11526中’檢查TG計數是否為p2(拉力釣匹配 主軸角度)若TG計數不為P2的話,則再度回到步驟SU524 ,否則若TG計數為P2的話,則前進至下一個步驟sn527 ,此時縫紉機停止,之後前進至第丨〇丨或丨〇2圖中繪示之流 程圖的上述步驟S1153。 " 於第104圖繪示的一個情況中,有一個用以偵測拉力 鉤匹配位置的感測器或類似裝置配置在縫紉機主軸内,使 縫初機能夠於拉力鉤匹配位置處停止,尤其是在步驟 S11521中,首先輸出縫紉機啟動信號,而在下一個步驟 S 11 522中,檢查拉力鉤位置感測器是否開啟。若拉力鉤 位置感測器開啟,則前進至下一個步驟S11529,否則若 拉力鉤位置感測器未開啟’則再度回到步驟S11 5 2 8。 於步驟S11529中’當缝切機停止信號輸出時,則前進 至第101或102圖中續示之流程圖的上述步驟S1153。 於此’在步驟S11529中的縫紉機停止信號之輸出係藉 由固定位置停止操作完成,使縫紉機能夠收到來自縫切機 主轴内配置之位置偵測裝置的一個信號而停止》 現在’第105圖繪示了用以切斷電源之繼電器的—個 流程圖。尤其是在第105圖中,有一條電源線172不僅接至 必須接於一 I/O介面109的一塊電源電路板171上,亦接至 一個縫紉機馬達驅動裝置115,電源線172内配置有_個電 源開關(一種電磁式啟/閉裝置)173,有一個繼電器I”接 至電源開關(電磁式啟/閉裝置)173,而繼電器174另— 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公楚) (請先閱讒背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂 線. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 A7 -—-----21____ 五、發明說明(92 ) 終端上面的—條纜線1 75則接至I/O介面1〇9。 關於上述第1〇1及1〇2圖中敘述過之繼電器,係以此方 式接至電源開關(電磁啟/閉裝置)173的繼電器174。 於此,當這種接至電源開關(電磁啟/閉裝置)173之繼 電器174係用作第102圖中繪示之繼電器時,若繼電器174 被關閉的話,則整個系統之電源將被切斷,使其無法再度 由CPU100供電。 此外,第106圖繪示了用以切斷電源之繼電器的另— 個配置,於第106圖中,有一條電源線172不僅接至必須接 於一 I/O介面109的一塊電源電路板17丨上,亦接至必須接 於一縫紉機馬達驅動裝置115的一塊驅動電源控制電路板 181,而在電源線162内配置有一個電源開關(一種電磁式 啟/閉裝置)173,並有一個零交又繼電器182安裝於驅動電 源控制電路板181上面。 這種零交又繼電器182亦可用作第102圖中繪示之電源 繼電器。 於此’當這種零交叉繼電器182被用作第101圖中繪示 之電源繼電器時,即使馬達驅動電源被繼電器182關閉, 電源仍舊持續供應給CPU100之周邊裝置,因此若設定鍵 147再度開啟’則馬達驅動電源可以開啟。 其次’第107圖緣示了縫線插入模式操作的另一個實 施例’尤其是,在第1 07圖中繪示之本實施例中,當缝線 插入模式操作(S112)之步驟S1128完成後,依序進行繼電 器關閉指令程序(步驟S1132)、檢查設定鍵開啟與否之程 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -95 : i . /政--------訂---------線 (請先閱議背面之if意事項再填寫本頁) A7 五、發明說明( 序(步驟S1133)、以及用於指令 '伯往斤之電源繼電器(步驟 S 1134) 〇 (請先閱纔背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 也就是說’於步驟81132中’電源繼電器被關閉,之 後在下-個步驟S1133中,檢查設定鍵147是否開啟。若 $定鍵i47開啟,則前進至下一個步,否則若設 叱鍵147未開啟,則再度回到步驟s丨丨33。 於步驟S1134中,電源繼電器(第1〇6圖中繪示之零交 叉繼電器182)被開啟,而之後進行至通用流程圖(第 中的上述步驟S2 » 如第108圖中繪示之實施例,於步驟S1132中,電源繼 電器(第105圖中繪示之繼電器174)可予以關閉。 於此,與上述之線轴箱匹配模式操作一樣,當第1〇6 圖中繪示之零交又繼電器i 82被用作第i 〇7圖中敘述之電源 繼電器時,即使馬達驅動電源被繼電器i 82切斷,電源仍 舊持續供應給CPU100之周邊裝置,因此若設定鍵147再度 開啟,則馬達驅動電源可以開啟。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 此外’當第1 05圖中繪示之繼電器! 74被用作第1 〇8圖 中敘述之電源繼電器時’若繼電器174被關閉,則整個系 統之電源將被切斷,使其無法再度由CPU 1 〇〇供電》 其次,第64圖繪示了刀具驅動時間操作(步驟S36)的 一個修正,在此修正中,於將縫線數目Μ=5 Σ n=2Nn增加到 右侧平行部分啟動位置之操作步驟S361與用於第64圖中 繪示之上述子程序中的Μη=((Ι^+8)+ e)+M之操作步驟 S362之間,包括了 一個用以檢查刀具驅動次數的步驟(步 90 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公餐) A7Printed by the Employees' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ________B7__ V. Description of the invention (86) Determined based on the addition value (absolute value) of the number of pulses at the stitching start position shown in circle 82. Here's the picture 86. There is a difference between the front cutter cutting procedure, the back sewing cutting procedure, and the inter-sewing cutting procedure. First, as shown in Figure 86 (a), the pre-sewing cutting procedure is a procedure in which a button hole is lowered and a button hole is opened in advance before sewing a buttonhole darning stitch. Moreover, as shown in Fig. 86 (b), the back stitch cutting program is a cutting program in which a button is lowered to open a button hole after the buttonhole darning stitching is completed. Moreover, as shown in Fig. 86 (c), the inter-sewing cutting program is a cutting program that lowers the cutter to open a button hole when sewing a buttonhole darning suture. Next, Fig. 87 shows the state of the buttonhole darning stitch in the case of pre-stitch cutting. For example, first, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), when the upper and lower fabrics are cut with a pre-sewing cutting process to open a button hole H, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), during the stitching process, A needle 9 through which the upper suture passes is passed through the button hole η to connect the upper and lower sutures together, so as to perform silk-drawing sewing. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), after the stitched portion with the above-mentioned drawing seam is completed by the needle 9 passing through the button hole H, no wire (braided wire) can be left in the button hole 1}. ). On the other hand, Fig. 88 shows the state of the buttonhole stitches during the back stitch cutting process and the cross stitch cutting process. Here, in the back seam cutting process and inter-seam cutting process, when the size of the buttonhole woven paper is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) IIJ — --- I IV—-II-(Please Read the long-term items on the back and then fill in this page.) Order · -I · A7 A7 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (1) Or open buttonhole Η. In this case, in order to not cut the suture, a certain gap must be reserved between the sutures on the left and right stitches. Therefore, as shown in Figure 88, on the left and right sides of buttonhole Η Above, some cloth will remain between the stitches of the respective side stitching portions. Furthermore, another pattern operation subroutine embodiment may also be used, in which the operation shown in FIG. Dimensions based on the conditions shown below, i.e. cloth cutting length a, left cutter width ratio, right cutter width ^ dense line length c, incoming line width d, parallel part pitch e, dense line part pitch f, cutter section ~ Under-gap clearance g, and the second dense line clearance of the cutter g. In addition, in the setting item table shown in FIG. 95, the tool width in the table shown in FIG. 39 is divided into the left tool width and the right tool width, and the left and right positions of the tool drop are ignored. Now, Fig. 96 shows a subroutine for starting stitching operation (step S381). In the subroutine of step S3811, first calculate y〗 = c / 2, set Kl = bl in the next step S3812, and in the next step Calculate Hd-O ^ + bOQ} in 33813, set the starting tension of the butadiene suture in the next step S3814, and then proceed to the above step S382 of the flowchart shown in FIG. 89. In addition, specify the above ^ by each And the dagger, the gap from the lowering point of the cutter to the left and right sutures can be adjusted separately. Now, Fig. 97 shows a subroutine (step S3 82) for the right side parallel operation, which is first set in the subroutine of step S3 821. n — in the next step S3822, set ΥΡ0 'and in the next " step = 8 = | · t equipment -------- order --------! line ^ read first read the note on the back Please fill in this page again for matters} V. Description of Invention () '' Set K5 = 0 ° followed by '4 in step 4 and calculate H5 = (d + bl + b2) / 2. Then in the next step 83825, set the & parallel part tension. T Also, in the next step "826, Set Y6 = e, and in the next step _827, calculate WgHe. Then, in the next step S3 828, 'Set 〖6 = 〇, set η = 0 in the next step S3829, and in the next step S3530, set T6 = parallel tension. After 6, proceed to the above step S383 of the flowchart shown in FIG. 89. Now 'Figure 98 shows a subroutine (steps) of the operation of the first dense line. In the subroutine of step S3831, first set Υ〆, and in the next step S3832', calculate N ~ f, in the next step In ㈣M3, calculate K3 = {(d + bi + b2) / 2}; N3, and in the next step S, calculate HeKd + bi + b2) /}} N3. After that, in the next step S3835, set the Ding Lumi thread tension ′ in the next step S3836 ′ and set Y4 = f, and in the next step S3837, calculate n4 = c + f. After that, in the next step S3838, set 1 = 〇, in the next step S3839, set H3 = 0 ', and in the next step S384〇, set D4 = ”the tension of the dense thread part, and then proceed to the drawing in Figure 89. The flow chart shown above is the above step S3.84. The grandson of the chanting part ~ the adjustment process (step S385), in the subroutine of step S3851 'first set in the next step S3852, set Y7 = 〇, and in the next step In ㈣8, set 1 = 0. After that, in the next step of the magic 854, count and in the next step of the magic 855, set T7 =, dense, invention description () partial tension ". In addition, Y ^ f is set in the next step 33856, and Ns = c + f is calculated in the next step S3857. After that, in the next step s3858, set Ks = 0, in the next step S3859 _, set 〇, in the next step S3860, set eight = "dense thread part tension," and then proceed to the drawing shown in Figure 89 The above step S386 of the flowchart. Now, Fig. 100 shows a subroutine of the suture end operation (step 33 86). In the subroutine of step 33 861, first set ya 9 = bu in the next step S3862, calculate N9 = (c / 2) + f, and in the next step s3863, calculate N9. In addition, in the next step S3864, calculate H9 = {d_ (bi + b2) / 2} +% 'In the next step S3865, Set T9 = ”stitch end tension. In the next step S3866, calculate the total number of sutures = 9Ση = 2Nη, and then proceed to the above step 836 of the flowchart shown in FIG. 49. Next, FIG. 101 illustrates another embodiment of the pull hook matching mode operation. In this embodiment, after step S1148 of the pull hook matching mode operation (step S114) shown in FIG. 47 is completed, Perform a sewing machine spindle angle matching program (step S1152), a relay-off instruction program (step S1153), a program for determining whether a setting key is on (step su54), and a power supply for a command program (step SU55). In other words, in step S1148, the swing width pulse motor (needle swing speed pulse motor) 41 is driven by the needle swing speed pulse motor drive device 114. In the next step 31152, the sewing machine main shaft 5 invention description (90) 1 kiss . In the next step, the relay of the power supply in SU53 was turned off. An operator performed a pull fishing matching procedure. Then in the next step S1154, check whether the setting key 147 is turned on. If < • and the 疋 key 147 is turned on, proceed to the next step s 11 55 If the exclamation key 147 is not turned on, then return to step s again〗丨 54. This is in step S1155. After the relay of the power supply is turned off, it proceeds to the above step S2 in the general flowchart (FIG. 37). In a case shown in step 102), in the step, the “swing width pulse motor (needle swing speed pulse motor) 4” is driven by the needle swing speed pulse motor driving device 114, and the sewing machine is sewn in the next step S11 52. The spindle angles are matched. In the next step 81153, the relay of the power supply is turned off, and an operator performs a pull hook matching procedure. Now, Fig. I03 shows a subroutine of the Z sewing machine spindle angle matching procedure ( Step S1152) 'In the subroutine of step S11521, first output the sewing machine start signal and check whether the detection of the position above the needle shows that the sewing machine is in an abnormal position. If the detection of the position above the needle shows that the sewing machine is not in the normal position, proceed to The next step is 81 1523, or if the position detection above the needle does not show abnormal positioning, then return to step S11522 again. In step S11523, the 'TG count is set to 0, and in the next step SU524, check the TG interrupt request. If there is a “master who has a TG interruption request”, then in the next step S1 1525, the TG meter Increase the number by one, and then proceed to the next step S11526, otherwise if the TG is interrupted and you have to wait for each of them, the paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) A7 _________B7 91 ---------- V. Description of the invention () Then return to step S11524 again. In step S11526, 'check whether the TG count is p2 (pulling fishing matches the spindle angle). If the TG count is not P2, then Return to step SU524 again. Otherwise, if the TG count is P2, proceed to the next step sn527, at which time the sewing machine stops, and then proceed to the above step S1153 of the flowchart shown in Figure 丨 〇 丨 or 丨 〇2. " In the situation shown in Fig. 104, a sensor or similar device for detecting the matching position of the tension hook is arranged in the main shaft of the sewing machine, so that the initial sewing machine can stop at the matching position of the tension hook, especially It is in step S11521 that the sewing machine start signal is output first, and in the next step S 11 522, it is checked whether the tension hook position sensor is turned on. If the tension hook position sensor is turned on, it proceeds to the next step S1 1529, otherwise, if the pull hook position sensor is not turned on ', then return to step S11 5 2 8. In step S11529,' when the sewing machine stops signal output, then proceed to the process continued in Figure 101 or 102 The above step S1153 in the figure. Here, the output of the sewing machine stop signal in step S11529 is completed by a fixed position stop operation, so that the sewing machine can stop by receiving a signal from a position detection device arranged in the main shaft of the sewing machine. "Now Figure 105 shows a flowchart of the relay used to cut off the power. Especially in FIG. 105, there is a power cord 172 connected not only to a power circuit board 171 which must be connected to an I / O interface 109, but also to a sewing machine motor driving device 115. The power cord 172 is provided with _ Power switch (an electromagnetic opening / closing device) 173, one relay I "is connected to the power switch (electromagnetic opening / closing device) 173, and the relay 174 is another — this paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 Gongchu) (Please read the precautions on the back of the page before filling out this page) Threading. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. --- 21____ 5. Description of the invention (92) The one above the terminal—a cable 1 75 is connected to the I / O interface 1009. Regarding the relays described in the above 101 and 102, the relays are based on This way is connected to the relay 174 of the power switch (electromagnetic on / off device) 173. Here, when this kind of relay 174 connected to the power switch (electromagnetic on / off device) 173 is used as the relay shown in FIG. 102 If relay 174 is turned off, the whole The system's power will be cut off, so that it can no longer be powered by the CPU 100. In addition, Figure 106 shows another configuration of the relay used to cut off the power. In Figure 106, there is a power cord 172 not only connected To a power circuit board 17 丨 which must be connected to an I / O interface 109, and to a drive power control circuit board 181 which must be connected to a sewing machine motor driving device 115, and a power source is arranged in the power line 162 A switch (an electromagnetic opening / closing device) 173, and a zero-crossing relay 182 is installed on the driving power control circuit board 181. This zero-crossing relay 182 can also be used as a power relay shown in FIG. 102 Here, when this zero-crossing relay 182 is used as the power relay shown in FIG. 101, even if the motor drive power is turned off by the relay 182, the power is still continuously supplied to the peripheral devices of the CPU 100, so if the setting key 147 is again 'On' then the motor drive power can be turned on. Secondly, "the edge of Fig. 107 shows another embodiment of the operation of the suture insertion mode" In particular, the implementation shown in Fig. 107 When the step S1128 of the suture insertion mode operation (S112) is completed, the relay closing instruction procedure (step S1132) is performed in order, and the process of checking whether the setting key is turned on or not is used. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 210 X 297 mm) -95: i. / 政 -------- Order --------- line (please read the items on the back before filling out this page) A7 5. Description of the invention (Procedure (step S1133), and the power relay (step S1134) for commanding to the bottom (step S1134)) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) That means 'in step 81132' power supply The relay is turned off, and then in the next step S1133, it is checked whether the setting key 147 is turned on. If the $ definite key i47 is turned on, it proceeds to the next step, otherwise if the 叱 key 147 is not turned on, it returns to step s 丨 丨 33 again. In step S1134, the power relay (zero-crossing relay 182 shown in FIG. 10) is turned on, and then proceeds to the general flow chart (the above step S2 in the »» embodiment shown in FIG. 108) In step S1132, the power relay (relay 174 shown in FIG. 105) can be turned off. Here, the operation is the same as that of the bobbin box matching mode described above. When the zero crossing shown in FIG. When the relay i 82 is used as the power relay described in the figure i 07, even if the motor drive power is cut off by the relay i 82, the power is still continuously supplied to the peripheral devices of the CPU 100. Therefore, if the setting key 147 is turned on again, the motor drives The power can be turned on. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. In addition, 'When the relay shown in Fig. 105! 74 is used as the power relay described in Fig. 108' If relay 174 is turned off, then The power of the entire system will be cut off, so that it can no longer be powered by the CPU 100. Second, Figure 64 shows a modification of the tool drive time operation (step S36). In this modification, The operation steps S361 for increasing the number M = 5 Σ n = 2Nn to the starting position of the parallel part on the right side and Mη = ((Ι ^ + 8) + e) + M in the above-mentioned subroutine shown in FIG. 64 Between operation steps S362, a step for checking the number of times the tool is driven is included (step 90 This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 meals) A7

五、發明說明(94 ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 驟S372)以及一個用以設定q之步驟(步驟s373)。 也就是說,於步驟8361中,算ώΜ=5Ση=2Νη,而之後 在下一個步驟S372中,檢查刀具驅動之設定次數是否為 欠或兩"'人以上,若為一次的話,則在下一個步驟S 3 7 3 中,將as史疋於、中,而之後在下一個步驟8362中,算出 Μη=((Ι^+β)+ e)+M。 此外,於步驟S372中,若刀具之驅動次數非為一次的 話’則直接前進至步驟S3 62。 在此情況中’若布料裁剪長度及刀具尺寸被設為彼此 相等’則刀具之驅動次數為一次或一段時間。 若面板上設定為“一段時間”,則將a設定於q中,而 在步驟S364中,χ=〇始終為’,是”。 <其他實施例> 再者’第67圖繪示了建構一個進給感測器和一個刀具 下降開關以根據Υ進給而設定裁布刀之運作時間的另一個 實施例,尤其是,首先在固定於進給機構21之進給軸22的 托架23上面垂直地固定一塊彳貞測板161,其板面朝向旁邊 ’並有一個閉路式的進給感測器162作為缝合移動位置摘 測裝置,其係根據偵測板161之Υ方向移動位置偵測出縫 合移動為前進移動或後退移動,其並朝偵測板161之移動 方向而配置在偵測板161的反侧。 此外’在彳貞測板161的其中一側面上形成有一對前後 突出部分163及163,並有一個刀具下降開關164配置在突 出部分163之移動路徑中的突出部分163反側,其係能夠藉 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 97 -------------^政--------訂..--------線------ * (請先閲說背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) _ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 -----2L_____ QC 丨丨丨丨 五、發明說明() 由該對突出部分163及163的其中一個壓下而偵測的一個部 分。也就是說,於第67圖中繪示之實施例中,每當刀具下 降開關164被兩個前後突出部分163及163壓下時,裁布刀 氣缸30會被驅動,以將裁布刀16上下移動兩次。 在本實施例中,刀具下降開關164係用作刀具向下移 動啟動時間設定裝置。 現在,第106圖繪示了配置有一個縫針位置感測器的 另一個實施例,如第106圊中所示,在此實施例中,缝針 位置感測器191包括有一個配置在針天心擺動底座18之下 方部分前表面側上面的閉路式磁性感測器,而必須偵測的 磁鐵192則内嵌於針天心擺動底座18之下方部分前表面側 内部。 換句話說,根據本發明,如第1〇6圖之實施例中所示 ’除了基線原點偵測感測器5 7、擺動寬度原點偵測感測器 58、以及縫針擺動左右侧位置偵測感測器59之外,亦可配 置縫針位置感測器191。 於上述之各實施例中,已經敘述過鈕孔織補縫紉機, 然而本發明並不限於此,本發明亦可應用於其他種類的縫 針擺動縫紉機中。 此外,例示之實施例的具體詳細結構亦可適當地改變 〇 舉例來說’可以不用縫針上方位置偵測,而改用縫針 下方位置偵測或狀態偵測。 再者,於本實施例中,已經敘述過各參數經過運算及 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) <請先閱#背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) I. i線· l· 402649 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(96 ) S史疋而設疋刀具傳動時間或鈕孔外形之各個尺寸的結構。 然而,同樣之效果亦可於另一種將事先經過程式處理之資 料設定及儲存,並選擇性地讀出之結構中得到。此外,可 將運算及設定過一次之參數儲存起來,之後這些參數可以 選擇性地讀出。再者,亦可使用其中縫紉機之上下轴能夠 由分開配置之馬達分別控制或旋轉的一個結構。 直到目前為止所敘述過的,利用本發明於第一項觀點 中敘述的鈕孔織補縫紉機,由於當縫針停止信號產生時, 缝針停止位置或擺動位置可藉由缝針下降控制裝置而設定 在比裁布刀更接近操作者右側的位置上,因此當縫針停止 信號產生時,縫線可以报容易地穿過於裁布刀右侧上面停 止之縫針的針眼,而不會受到裁布刀之阻礙。 利用本發明於第二項觀點中敘述的鈕孔織補縫紉機, 則除了得到本發明於第一項觀點中所述之效果外,可得到 的另一個好處在於當鈕孔織補縫線形成之後,最後一根縫 針可在比裁布刀更右側之位置上面停止。 利用本發明於第二項觀點中敘述的鈕孔織補縫紉機, 則除了得到本發明於第一項或第二項觀點中所述之效果外 ,可得到的另一個好處在於當鈕孔織補縫線形成時,最後 一根縫針可在比裁布刀更右侧之位置上面完全停止。 利用本發明於第四項觀點中敘述的鈕孔織補縫紉機, 2於當縫紉機被迫停止時,根據縫,針下降控制裝置產生的 —個指令以及控制開關所產生的信號,缝針停止位置或擺 動位置可以透過電動裝置之驅動而設定在比裁布刀更接近 (請先閲諫背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂- ;線· l· · n n n 本紙張尺度適用Tiiii^(CNS)A4規格⑽x 297公髮1V. Description of the invention (94) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy (Step S372) and a step for setting q (Step s373). That is to say, in step 8361, the calculation is counted as M = 5Ση = 2Nη, and then in the next step S372, it is checked whether the set number of times of tool driving is less than or equal to two or more " 'more than one person. In S 3 7 3, as is stored in the middle, and then in the next step 8362, Mn = ((1 ^ + β) + e) + M is calculated. In addition, in step S372, if the number of times the tool is driven is not one time, the process proceeds directly to step S36. In this case, 'if the cutting length of the cloth and the size of the cutter are set to be equal to each other', the number of times the cutter is driven is once or for a period of time. If it is set to "a period of time" on the panel, a is set to q, and in step S364, χ = 0 is always 'Yes'. ≪ Other embodiments > Furthermore, FIG. 67 illustrates Another embodiment of constructing a feed sensor and a knife-down switch to set the operating time of the cloth cutter according to the feed of the knives, in particular, firstly on a bracket fixed to the feed shaft 22 of the feed mechanism 21 23 A vertical measuring plate 161 is vertically fixed on the upper surface, and its surface is facing to the side, and a closed-loop feed sensor 162 is used as a sewing moving position picking device, which moves the position according to the direction of the detecting plate 161. It is detected that the suture movement is a forward movement or a backward movement, and is arranged on the opposite side of the detection plate 161 in the direction of the movement of the detection plate 161. In addition, a pair of front and rear protrusions are formed on one side surface of the measurement plate 161 Parts 163 and 163, and a cutter down switch 164 is arranged on the opposite side of the protruding part 163 in the moving path of the protruding part 163, which can apply the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) based on this paper size ) 97 ----------- -^ 政 -------- Order ..-------- Line ------ * (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) _ Intellectual Property of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Bureau A7 ----- 2L_____ QC 丨 丨 丨 丨 V. Description of the Invention () A part detected by pressing down one of the pair of protruding parts 163 and 163. That is, In the embodiment shown in FIG. 67, each time the cutter lowering switch 164 is depressed by the two front and rear protruding portions 163 and 163, the cloth cutter cylinder 30 is driven to move the cloth cutter 16 up and down twice. In this embodiment, the tool down switch 164 is used as a device for setting the start time of the downward movement of the tool. Now, Fig. 106 shows another embodiment equipped with a needle position sensor, as shown in Fig. 106 (a). In this embodiment, the needle position sensor 191 includes a closed-circuit magnetic sensor arranged on the front surface side of the lower part of the needle tianxin swing base 18, and the magnet 192 that must be detected is embedded in The inner part of the front surface side of the lower part of the needle-shaped heart swing base 18. In other words, according to the present invention, as shown in FIG. 106 As shown in the examples, 'In addition to the baseline origin detection sensor 5 7, the swing width origin detection sensor 58, and the needle swing left and right position detection sensors 59, a needle position sensor can also be configured. Tester 191. In each of the above embodiments, the buttonhole darning sewing machine has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can also be applied to other types of needle swing sewing machines. In addition, the illustrated embodiment is specific The detailed structure can also be changed appropriately. For example, 'the position detection or state detection under the needle may not be used instead. Moreover, in this embodiment, it has been described that the parameters have been calculated and the paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) < Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) I. i-line · 402649 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (96) S History and the structure of each size of the tool drive time or button hole shape. However, the same effect can also be obtained in another structure in which data that has been processed in advance is set and stored, and selectively read out. In addition, parameters that have been calculated and set once can be stored, and then these parameters can be read out selectively. Furthermore, a structure in which the upper and lower shafts of the sewing machine can be separately controlled or rotated by separately arranged motors may be used. As described so far, using the buttonhole darning sewing machine described in the first aspect of the present invention, when the needle stop signal is generated, the needle stop position or swing position can be set by the needle lowering control device. It is closer to the operator's right side than the cutting knife, so when the needle stop signal is generated, the thread can easily pass through the eye of the needle stopped on the right side of the cutting knife without being blocked by the cutting knife. . By using the buttonhole darning sewing machine described in the second aspect of the present invention, in addition to obtaining the effects described in the first aspect of the present invention, another advantage that can be obtained is that after the buttonhole darning stitches are formed, finally A needle can be stopped at a position further to the right than the cutter. Using the buttonhole darning sewing machine described in the second aspect of the present invention, in addition to obtaining the effects described in the first or second aspect of the present invention, another advantage that can be obtained is when the buttonhole darning stitches are used. When it is formed, the last needle can be stopped completely on the right side of the knife. By using the buttonhole darning sewing machine described in the fourth aspect of the present invention, 2 when the sewing machine is forced to stop, according to a command generated by the sewing and needle lowering control device and a signal generated by the control switch, the needle stop position or The swing position can be set closer to the cloth cutter by the drive of the electric device (please read the precautions on the back of the page before filling this page). Order-; line · l · · nnn This paper size is applicable to Tiiii ^ (CNS) A4 Specifications ⑽ x 297 public hair 1

n I A7 B7 97 五、發明說明() 操作者右側的位置上,因此縫線可以很容易地穿過於裁布 刀右側上面停止之縫針的針眼,而不會受到裁布刀之阻礙 元件標號對照 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1...縫紉機機架 側位置 1、8、9、16··.縫針下降點 12...掛鉤、拉力鉤 3、5、7、9、11、13、14... 12a...頂端 縫針點 13...線軸箱 2...底座 14…布料固定板 3...垂直本體部分 15...壓布機 4...手臂 15a...縫針針眼 5...馬達 15b...刀具槽 6·.·上軸 16...裁布刀 6a、10a...斜齒輪 16a...小孔 7...曲柄機構 16b、16d...斜裁部分 8...針天心 16c...排氣口 9...縫針 17...天平 9a...針眼 18...針天心擺動底座 10...垂直轴 18a.. ·支轴 10b、11a...斜齒輪 19·.·拉力組塊 11···下軸、檢查刀具下降左右 20...進給馬達、Y進給脈衝馬達 ------------- I.------訂---------線 (請先閱讒背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -lUD - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 35b...連桿 36.. .刀具傳動手臂 37…刀具傳動鉤 37a...喷合凹部 37b...彈簧 37c...極轴 37d...突出部分 37e…抽 38.. .啟動桿 39.. .推桿 40…基線馬達、基線進給脈衝馬達 40a、41a...小齒輪 40b、41b···蝸桿 41.. .擺動寬度馬達、縫針擺動 進給脈衝馬達 42.. .縫針擺動機構 43.. .基線手臂 43a、55a…支撐軸 43b、43d、55b、55d...扇形齒輪 43c、55c...磁鐵 43e、55e...°#合棍軸 44.. .基線槓桿 44a、45a、46a、56a...水平極轴 45.. .連桿 ---------I I I I -------I ---------^ (請先閱護背面之泫意事項再填寫本頁)n I A7 B7 97 V. Description of the invention () The position on the right side of the operator, so the suture can easily pass through the eye of the needle stopped on the right side of the cutting knife without being blocked by the cutting knife. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1 ... Side machine position 1, 8, 9, 16 .... Needle drop point 12 ... Hook, pull hook 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 14 ... 12a ... Top stitch point 13 ... Spool box 2 ... Base 14 ... Cloth fixing plate 3 ... Vertical body part 15 ... Cloth press 4 ... Arm 15a. .. Needle eye 5 ... Motor 15b ... Tool slot 6 ... Upper shaft 16 ... Cloth cutter 6a, 10a ... Helical gear 16a ... Small hole 7 ... Crank mechanism 16b, 16d ... beveled part 8 ... needle center 16c ... exhaust port 9 ... stitch 17 ... balance 9a ... needle 18 ... needle center swing base 10 ... vertical axis 18a .. · Support shafts 10b, 11a ... Helical gears 19 ·· Rally block 11 ··· Lower shaft, check tool down left and right 20 ... Feed motor, Y feed pulse motor -------- ------- I .------ Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back of 谗 before filling this page) ) -lUD-This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 35b ... Connecting rod 36. .. Tool transmission arm 37 ... Tool driving hook 37a ... Spraying recess 37b ... Spring 37c ... Polar shaft 37d ... Protruding part 37e ... Pumping 38 .. Actuating lever 39 ... Pusher 40 ... Baseline motor, baseline feed Pulse motors 40a, 41a ... Pinions 40b, 41b ... Worm 41 ... Swing width motor, Needle swing feed pulse motor 42 ... Needle swing mechanism 43 ... Baseline arms 43a, 55a ... Support shaft 43b, 43d, 55b, 55d ... sector gears 43c, 55c ... magnets 43e, 55e ... ° # 合 棒 轴 44 .. baseline levers 44a, 45a, 46a, 56a ... horizontal polar axis 45 ... Connecting rod --------- IIII ------- I --------- ^ (Please read the precautions on the back of the protector before filling out this page)

QQ 五、發明說明() 20a··.小齒輪 21.. .進給機構 22.. .進給軸* 22a...齒條 22b...1#合樞軸 23.. .托架 24.. .布料固定手臂 24a·.·樞軸 25.. .安裝件 26.. .進給原點偵測感測器 27…進給螺桿 28.. .有槽凸輪 28a··.凸輪槽 29.. .進給馬達 30.. .裁布刀氣缸元件、裁布刀 下行氣缸 31…刀具安裝板 31a...偵測部分 32.. .螺桿 32a...墊圈 33.. .復位彈簧 34a、34b…感測器 35.. .傳動桿 35a…轴 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)QQ V. Description of the invention () 20a ... Pinion 21. Feed mechanism 22. Feed axis * 22a ... Rack 22b ... 1 # 合 轴 轴 23 ... .. cloth fixing arm 24a .. pivot 25 .. mounting piece 26 .. feed origin detection sensor 27. feed screw 28 .. slotted cam 28a .. cam slot 29. .. feed motor 30 .. cutter cylinder element, cutter down cylinder 31 ... cutter mounting plate 31a ... detection part 32 ... screw 32a ... washer 33 ... return spring 34a , 34b ... Sensor 35 .. Transmission rod 35a ... The size of the paper is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

TUT A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 99五、發明說明() 46.··縫針擺動凸輪槓桿 46b...嚙合凹進部分 47.. .縫針擺動槓桿 48.. .連接軸 49.. .縫針擺動手臂 50··.布料針形金屬板 50a...孔 50b...刀槽 51、52...減速齒輪 52a...磁鐵 53…副轴 54.. .縫針擺動凸輪 55.. .擺動寬度手臂 56.. .擺動寬度槓桿 57.. .基線原點偵測感測器 58.. .擺動寬度原點偵測感測器 5 9...縫針擺動左右側位置偵測 感測器 60.. .音頻線圈馬達 61.. .柱塞 62.. .槓桿 62a...樞轴 63.. .控制軸 64.. .轴承箱 65.··中空軸 66.. .拉力盤、内盤、活動盤 66a...接觸件 67.. .拉力盤、外盤、固定盤 70、71…有槽凸輪 70a、71a...凸輪槽 72.. .主凸輪 72a…切口 73.. .起動手臂 74.. .凸輪控制機構 75.. .螺線管 75a...柱塞 76…刀具安裝件 76a...安裝凹部 76b...突出部分 76c...傾斜部分 77.. .判定開關 77a...壓按切換部分 78a...階式螺桿 78b...支撐彈簧 79a、7%、79c...判定感測器 80.. .脈衝馬達、裁線進給脈衝馬達 80a...輸出軸 81.. .手臂 (請先閱讒背面之Η意事項再填寫本頁) - •線· 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)TUT A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 99. Fifth, the invention description () 46. ·· Needle swing cam lever 46b ... Engage recessed part 47 .. Needle swing lever 48 .. Connecting shaft 49 .. Needle swing arm 50 ..... Cloth needle-shaped metal plate 50a ... Hole 50b ... Slot 51, 52 ... Reduction gear 52a ... Magnet 53 ... Countershaft 54 ... Needle swing cam 55 .. swing width arm 56 .. swing width lever 57 .. baseline origin detection sensor 58 .. swing width origin detection sensor 5 9 ... stitch swing left and right side position detection Sensor 60 .. Audio coil motor 61 .. Plunger 62 .. Lever 62a ... Pivot 63 .. Control shaft 64 .. Bearing housing 65 .. Hollow shaft 66 ... Tension plate, inner plate, movable plate 66a ... Contact 67. Tension plate, outer plate, fixed plate 70, 71 ... slotted cam 70a, 71a ... cam groove 72 ... main cam 72a ... cutout 73 .. Starter arm 74 .. Cam control mechanism 75 .. Solenoid 75a ... Plunger 76 ... Tool mount 76a ... Mounting recess 76b ... Protrusion 76c ... Tilt 77 ... Judgment switch 77a ... Press the switch part 78a ... Stepped screw 78b ... support springs 79a, 7%, 79c ... judgment sensors 80 ... pulse motor, wire feed pulse motor 80a ... output shaft 81 ... arm (please read the Please fill in this page if you have any questions)-• Line · This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

TUZ A7 B7 (請先閲遣背面之Vi意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(1(K)) 81a...機架部分 82.. .轉轴 83.. .滚動接頭 84.. .槓桿 85.. .剪刀安裝板 86.. .固定葉片 86a...突出部分 86b、87b...葉片部分 87.. .活動葉片 87a...弧形孔 87c...凸輪嚙合部分 88.. .階式螺釘 89.. .裁線彈簧TUZ A7 B7 (Please read the notice on the back and fill in this page first) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Description (1 (K)) 81a ... Shaft 83 .. Rolling joint 84 .. Lever 85 .. Scissor mounting plate 86 .. Fixed blade 86a ... protruding portion 86b, 87b ... blade portion 87 ... movable blade 87a ... Arc hole 87c ... Cam engaging portion 88 .. Step screw 89 .. Wire spring

90.. .縫線固定彈簧 100 …CPU90 .. suture fixing spring 100… CPU

101."ROM101. " ROM

102.. .RAM 103.. .Y進給計數器 104.. .基線進給計數器 105.. .縫針擺動進給計數器 106.. .裁布刀計數器 107.. .裁線進給計數器 108.. .中斷控制器 109.. .1.O 介面 110.. .控制面板 111.. . Υ進給脈衝驅動裝置 112…基線進給脈衝馬達驅動裝置 113.. .縫針擺動進給脈衝馬達驅 動裝置 114.. .裁線進給脈衝馬達驅動裝 置、縫針擺動進給脈衝馬 達驅動裝置 115.. .縫紉機馬達驅動裝置 116.. .縫針上方位置感測器 117.. .進給參考位置感測器 118.. . TG產生器 119.. .縫紉機馬達編碼器 120.. .主動張力驅動裝置 121.. .加壓器上升螺線管驅動電路 122.. .加壓器上升螺線管 123.. .裁布刀下行氣缸驅動電路 124.. .加壓器開關 125.. .啟動開關 126.. .裁線進給原點感測器 126a...裁線進給原點偵測磁鐵 127.. .裁布刀驅動請求開關 131.. .縫合鍵 132、 134、 135、 136、 137、 -ru3 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A7 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 B7 五、發明說明(1(n) 138…LED顯示部分 162、172...電源線 133...選擇鍵 173、176·.·電源開關 140...數值顯示部分 174...繼電器 141...圖案顯示部分 175...纜線 142...參數顯示部分 181...驅動電源控制電路板 143...負號鍵 182...零交叉繼電器 144...正號鍵 191...缝針位置感測器 145...下鍵 192…磁鐵 146...上鍵 601...輛 147...設定鍵 602...外桿 161...偵測板 603...中心桿 162...進給感測器 604...活動線圈 163…突出部分 605...鋼管 164...刀具下降開關 606...線圈 171...電路板 (請先閱洗背面之汰意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)102 .. RAM 103 .. Y feed counter 104 .. baseline feed counter 105 .. needle swing feed counter 106 .. knife counter 107 .. thread feed counter 108 .. .Interrupter controller 109..1.O interface 110 ... control panel 111 ... 脉冲 feed pulse drive 112 ... baseline feed pulse motor drive 113 ... needle swing feed pulse motor drive 114 .. thread cutting feed pulse motor driving device, needle swing feed pulse motor driving device 115.. Sewing machine motor driving device 116... Needle upper position sensor 117... Feed reference position sensor 118 .. TG generator 119 .. Sewing machine motor encoder 120 .. Active tension drive 121 .. Pressure booster solenoid drive circuit 122. Pressure booster solenoid 123 .. Cutting knife down cylinder driving circuit 124 .. Pressurizer switch 125 .. Start switch 126 .. Cutting wire feed origin sensor 126a ... Cutting wire feed origin detection magnet 127 .. Cloth knife drive request switch 131 .. Sewing keys 132, 134, 135, 136, 137, -ru3-This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Grid (210 X 297 mm) A7 A7 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs B7 V. Description of the invention (1 (n) 138 ... LED display section 162, 172 ... Power cord 133 ... Select key 173 , 176 ... Power switch 140 ... Numerical display section 174 ... Relay 141 ... Pattern display section 175 ... Cable 142 ... Parameter display section 181 ... Drive power control circuit board 143. .. minus key 182 ... zero crossing relay 144 ... positive key 191 ... stitch position sensor 145 ... down key 192 ... magnet 146 ... up key 601 ... car 147 ... setting key 602 ... outer rod 161 ... detection plate 603 ... center rod 162 ... feed sensor 604 ... movable coil 163 ... protruding portion 605 ... steel tube 164. ..Knife lowering switch 606 ... coil 171 ... circuit board (please read the instructions on the back of the wash before filling out this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

Claims (1)

經濟部中夬棣率局員工消費合作社印装 402649 g ~~~ — ___ D8 六、申請專利範圍 L 一種紐孔織補縫鲂機,其包括有· —根可朝左右方向擺動、並能夠於其擺動位置上 下移動而形成鈕孔織補缝線的縫針; 一塊沿縫紉機底座表面配置之布料固定板; 條配置在比各左右侧擺動位置更左側上面之布 料固定手臂,其前端部分位於一操作者側上面; 一個形成機架形狀,並能夠將鈕孔織補缝線外圍 邊緣之布料固定於布料固定板與其本身之間的機架形 夾板本體,夾板本體支撐於布料固定手臂之前端部分 右侧上面; 把大趙上可朝左右方向下降在機架形夾板本體 之機架形狀内的中心位置之裁布刀;以及 當用以停止縫紉機的一個信號產生時將擺動位 置固定而使缝針停止的位置座落在比裁布刀更接近操 作者右侧之縫針下降控制裝置。 2·如申請專利範圍第1項之鈕孔織補縫紉機,其中當鈕孔 織補縫線形成之後,縫針下降控制裝置將縫針停止位 置设定在比裁布刀更接近操作者右侧的位置上。 3·如申請專利範圍第1或2項之鈕孔織補縫紉機,其中縫 針下降控制裝置包括有供將縫針朝左右方向擺向特定 位置之電動裝置,以及一條產生獎動指令,使電動裝 置將縫針擺向縫針停止位置的控制電路。 4. 一種鈕孔織補縫紉機,其包括有: 一根可朝左右方向擺動、並能夠於其擺動位置上 <請先背面之'注$項再填寫本頁) •訂 線Printed by the Consumers Cooperative of the Zhongliu Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 402649 g ~~~ — ___ D8 VI. Application for patents L A buttonhole quilting sewing machine, which includes: — The root can swing in the left and right directions, and A sewing needle that moves up and down to form a buttonhole darning stitch; a cloth fixing plate arranged along the surface of the sewing machine base; a cloth fixing arm arranged on the upper left side than the left and right side swing positions, the front end portion of which is on the operator side Above; a rack-shaped plywood body that forms a rack shape and can fix the fabric at the peripheral edge of the buttonhole quilting stitch to the fabric fixing plate and itself, the splint body is supported on the right side of the front end of the fabric fixing arm; A cloth cutting knife that can move Da Zhao up and down to the center position in the frame shape of the frame-shaped plywood body; and a position that fixes the swing position to stop the needle when a signal to stop the sewing machine is generated The needle drop control device is located closer to the operator's right side than the cloth cutter. 2. The buttonhole darning sewing machine according to item 1 of the patent application scope, wherein when the buttonhole darning stitch is formed, the needle lowering control device sets the needle stop position closer to the operator's right side than the cutting knife. 3. If the buttonhole darning sewing machine in item 1 or 2 of the scope of patent application, the needle drop control device includes an electric device for swinging the needle to a specific position in the left-right direction, and a bonus movement command to cause the electric device to stitch the needle Control circuit for swinging the needle to the stop position. 4. A buttonhole darning sewing machine, which includes: a swingable left and right direction, and can be in its swing position < please fill in this page with the "Note $" on the back) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規格(210X297公釐) A8 B8 C8. D8 申請專利範囷 下移動而形成鈕孔織補縫線的縫針; 一塊沿縫鲂機底座表面配置之布料固定板; —條配置在比各左右側擺動位置更左側上面之布 料固疋手臂,其刖端部分位於一 _作者側上面; 一個形成機架形狀,並能夠將鈕孔織補縫線外圍 邊緣之布料固定於布料固定板與其本身之間的機架形 夾板本趙,夾板本*支撑·於布料固定手臂之前端部分 右侧上面;以及 一把大體上可朝左右方向下降在機架形夾板本體 之機架形狀内的中心位置之裁布刀, 钮孔織補縫紉機更包括有當操作時用以產生一信 號的一個控制開關;供將缝針朝左右方向擺向一特定 位置的電動裝置;以及連同控制開關產生之信號,將 縫針移動至比裁布刀更接近操作者右侧的擺動位置之 縫針下降控制裝置。 (請先聞面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 、1T .鎳 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 本紙浪尺度逋用中國國家橾準(CNS ) A4说格(21 Ox 297公釐)This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 mm) A8 B8 C8. D8 A needle that moves under the patent application range to form a buttonhole darning stitch; a cloth fixing plate arranged along the surface of the sewing machine base ;-The cloth is fixed on the upper left side than the left and right side swing positions of the cloth holding arm, the end of the cloth is located above the author's side; one forms a frame shape, and can fix the cloth edge of the buttonhole darning seam The rack-shaped plywood notebook between the cloth fixing plate and itself, the plywood notebook * supports and supports on the right side of the front end of the cloth-fixing arm; and a machine that can be lowered to the left and right in the rack-shaped plywood body. The cloth cutter at the center position in the frame shape, the buttonhole darning sewing machine further includes a control switch for generating a signal when operated; an electric device for swinging the sewing needle to a specific position in the left and right directions; and a control The signal generated by the switch moves the needle to the needle lowering control device which is closer to the swing position on the right side of the operator than the cutting knife. (Please read the notes before filling out this page), 1T. Nickel Printed by the Shell Industry Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs This paper uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 standard (21 Ox 297 mm)
TW87110364A 1997-06-27 1998-06-26 Buttonhole darning sewing machine TW402649B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP17264997A JP4026886B2 (en) 1997-06-27 1997-06-27 Buttonhole sewing machine

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW402649B true TW402649B (en) 2000-08-21

Family

ID=15945812

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW87110364A TW402649B (en) 1997-06-27 1998-06-26 Buttonhole darning sewing machine

Country Status (5)

Country Link
EP (1) EP0887452B1 (en)
JP (1) JP4026886B2 (en)
CN (1) CN1140660C (en)
DE (1) DE69808381T2 (en)
TW (1) TW402649B (en)

Families Citing this family (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE19951127C2 (en) * 1999-10-23 2002-06-20 Duerkopp Adler Ag Buttonhole sewing machine
JP4750954B2 (en) 2000-02-29 2011-08-17 Juki株式会社 Cycle sewing machine
JP2002233676A (en) * 2001-02-08 2002-08-20 Juki Corp Button holing sewing machine
JP5142426B2 (en) * 2001-04-13 2013-02-13 Juki株式会社 Buttonhole sewing machine
JP4744072B2 (en) 2003-10-31 2011-08-10 Juki株式会社 sewing machine
JP2007202679A (en) * 2006-01-31 2007-08-16 Juki Corp Thread tension device of sewing machine
JP2007202833A (en) * 2006-02-02 2007-08-16 Juki Corp Thread tension device of sewing machine
JP2007252740A (en) * 2006-03-24 2007-10-04 Brother Ind Ltd Holing machine
CN104088086A (en) * 2014-06-04 2014-10-08 池州学院 Intelligently controlled multifunctional sewing machine

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US1473240A (en) * 1922-06-08 1923-11-06 Frederick Osann Co Buttonhole-cutter mechanism
US2273242A (en) * 1940-01-24 1942-02-17 Singer Mfg Co Buttonhole cutting mechanism for sewing machines
US4185574A (en) * 1978-10-11 1980-01-29 The Singer Company Track guided needle threader system
JP2917324B2 (en) * 1989-10-31 1999-07-12 ブラザー工業株式会社 sewing machine
JP3061139B2 (en) * 1989-10-31 2000-07-10 ブラザー工業株式会社 Sewing machine with threading device
JPH05115635A (en) * 1991-05-27 1993-05-14 Brother Ind Ltd Sewing-machine for overcasting buttonhole

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP0887452A2 (en) 1998-12-30
JPH119861A (en) 1999-01-19
DE69808381D1 (en) 2002-11-07
EP0887452A3 (en) 1999-08-11
EP0887452B1 (en) 2002-10-02
CN1207425A (en) 1999-02-10
CN1140660C (en) 2004-03-03
DE69808381T2 (en) 2003-07-03
JP4026886B2 (en) 2007-12-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TW393540B (en) Buttonhole darning sewing machine
TWI363115B (en)
TW402649B (en) Buttonhole darning sewing machine
JP3739234B2 (en) Perforated sewing machine
TW567262B (en) Buttonhole sewing machine
JP3939114B2 (en) Buttonhole sewing machine
JP3938977B2 (en) Buttonhole sewing machine
JP3811032B2 (en) Buttonhole sewing machine
JP3780067B2 (en) Thread trimming control device for buttonhole sewing machine
JP3779574B2 (en) Buttonhole sewing machine
JP3779573B2 (en) Buttonhole sewing machine
JPH119859A (en) Button hole sewing machine
JPH119863A (en) Eyelet button holing stitch forming method, and button holing sewing machine
JP3614994B2 (en) Overlock sewing machine
JP2001314675A (en) Cycle sewing machine and storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
GD4A Issue of patent certificate for granted invention patent
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees